All dished up Shooting tables are among the most

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 7

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 8

All dished up Shooting tables are among the most convenient tools in photography, when photographing artistic set-ups or small objects. Professionals have long known this. The classic shooting table or a similar construction of stands, background paper and a horizontal board is part of their standard equipment. This is regardless of the camera technology they use, may it be analog or digital.

Shooting table - the very word makes you think of something bulky, furniture-like, complex and labor intensive.

You will see, that this is not necessarily true.

8

But digital photography and its possibilities in particular make the benefits of a shooting table obvious. No matter if you want to document your teddy bear or model car collection, photograph expensive jewelry or precious coins for insurence purposes or need a quick picture for an internet auction - digital photography with its connection to computer and printer makes it easy and the shooting table

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 9

provides support and background for the subject.

Some problems do not even come up because of features and properties of the features and properties of modern digital cameras. A zoom lens with macro setting is standard equipment for most of the digitals, the desired frame can be controlled with help of the camera monitor and nobody has to worry about parallax differences.

For the vast spectrum of tabletop photography Kaiser offers a variety of solutions to �dish up�: Fixed and portable units, for large or small, heavy or light subjects, variable system-based solutions with different components or complete units.

When your meal is dished up, everything should be nicely arranged.

Why not do it the same way with your product shots and still lifes?

The concave shaped background is the most important part of a shooting table. It provides a transition from foreground to background without a visible edge. There are additional possibilities if the concave-shaped background is made of translucent material and is illuminated from the bottom and/or from behind. Light and lighting are always important as some subjects need effective lighting to bring out their features.

Shooting Tables

99

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 10

TopTable PRO – The Compact Studio Tabletop photography on a professional level - that is what the TopTable PRO is designed for. In a floorspace of only 34 x 34 in. (85 x 85 cm) it offers a complete photographic studio with great versatility.

The secret of its success lies in its modularity: The shooting table forms a basic support that can be fitted with a concave curved acrylic-glass plate or a strong wooden board for heavy objects, and with a cardboard background.

To isolate objects entirely from any background, the basic table can also be fitted with a crystal-clear acrylicglass add-on table.

There are also side mounting brackets which can be used to attach lighting units from the Kaiser camera stand range. The lights can also be positioned underneath the acrylic-glass plate for transmitted light shots.

The shooting table can be easily wheeled on its castors to any point without having to dismantle lights and stands and set them up again.

10

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 11

This is the regular set-up: Basic Support 5921 and Acrylic-Glass Plate 5924 are all you need for standard tabletop photography. In addition you may use paper background of any width as shown in the picture at the bottom.

Existing lights (flash or continuous light) can be positioned on separate stands on both sides of the table. The Lighting Kit 5867 can be mounted directly to the table.

If photographed objects should appear to float in mid-air against the background, the Add-On Table 5922 is required.

The Lighting-Kit 5868 is mounted underneath the shooting table for transmitted light shots.

Some objects are too heavy, the acrylic-glass plate would bend under extreme load. That is why the Wooden Base Plate 5925 is available.

The concave shaped background is formed by background paper of any desired width. The Background Carrier 5923 holds the background paper roll.

Shooting Tables

11

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 12

5921 Basic Support

Strong square tube frame fitted with heightadjustable feet at the front and lockable castors at the back. Mounting facilities for reflected and transmitted lighting.

Height: 1.78 m (70 in.)

Working height: 80 cm (31.5 in.)

Required floor space: 85 x 85 cm (33.5 x 33.5 in.)

5926 Mounting Adapter 5924 Acrylic-Glass Plate

To attach Kaiser lighting units (see page 72) for reflective lighting to the Basic Support 5921. 2 pieces.

A white transparent background acrylic-glass plate that is mounted on the Basic Support 5921 to form a concave shaped base.

Width: 80 cm (31.5 in.)

Overall length: 168 cm (66.1 in.)

Thickness: 3 mm

5922 Add-On Table

Can be mounted on the basic table (consisting of the Basic Support 5921 and the Acrylic-Glass Plate 5924). The Add-On Table is supplied with a concave curved crystalclear acrylic plate.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 85 x 102 x 80 cm (33.5 x 40.2 x 31.5 in.)

5925 Wooden Base Plate

Can be mounted on the Basic Support 5921 (with or without Acrylic-Glass Plate 5924 attached). The matt grey laminated wooden plate is used in conjunction with paper background.

Dimensions: 85 x 56 cm (33.5 x 22 in.)

12

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

5923 Background Carrier

Seite 13

The carrier is mounted on the Basic Support 5921. Permits space-saving bearing of a background roll. Especially suited in combination with the Wooden Base Plate 5925.

Width: 85 cm (33.5 in.)

5867 Reflected Light Illuminating Set

5567

5868 Transmitted Light Illuminating Set

5567

5582 Filter Holders 5583 Diffusion Screens

5594 Polarizers

Shooting Tables

Is mounted to the Basic Support 5921.

Consists of two softlights and holding rods.

Lights can be slid, pivoted and adjusted in height. Vertical holding rods have height marks and can be tilted to different angles.

Fitted with two daylight fluorescents each, high-gloss inner finish and high-frequency operating system. Separate control box.

Lamps: Color temperature: CRI: Reflector size: 50 x 21

4 x 36 W 5400 Kelvin 90-100 (1A) cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

Is mounted to the Basic Support 5921.

Consists of two tiltable softlights, fitted with two daylight fluorescent lights each, highgloss inner finish and high-frequency operating system. Separate control box.

Lamps: Color temperature: CRI: Reflector size:

4 x 36 W 5400 Kelvin 90-100 (1A) 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

Guiding rails for slide-in filters for attachment to Reflected Lighting Unit 5867 and Transmitted Lighting Unit 5868. 2 pairs.

5582 5583

Fine structure acrylic glass. Can be mounted in conjunction with Filter Holders 5582 to Lighting Units 5867 and 5868. 2 pieces.

Can be mounted in conjunction with Filter Holders 5582 to Lighting Units 5867 and 5868. 2 pieces.

5594

13

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr

Seite 14

The Studio on Your Desk ”topTable” is a classic among the compact shooting tables. ”topTable” is not only a modular system with various components, but also a compact unit with ”desk-top size” dimensions of 20 x 19“.

Whether used as a complete digital desktop studio or composed of different components to specific requirements: ”topTable” copes with all problems of small object photography. Standard shooting situations with reflected light, silhouetting by background lighting, floating images, shots using a glass plate or a light tent – ”topTable” will always provide a solution.

Product shots, catalog photos, internet pictures, creative stills, scientific photography, shots of medical preparations and instruments: possible fields of applications are only limited by the size of the subject.

14

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 15

5928-29/5997-98 Table-Top-Studio ”digital” Complete desktop studio consisting of Small Product Table 5931 and lighting unit.

Product table with white transparent concave shaped acrylic background. Required desk space approx. 50 x 50 cm (20 x 20 in.).

Lighting unit consists of two small softlights for even and smooth illumination. Interior reflector for high light output. Holding rods with multiple orientation possibilities, screwon clamps for attachment.

5929 and 5998 include an extra camera clamp comprising a 55 cm (21.7 in.) swanneck arm for cameras up to 600 g (21 oz.), ball head with 30 mm (1.2 in.) base and 1/4” camera thread plus universal desk clamp for boards up to 30 mm (1.2 in.) thick or tubes up to 55 mm (2.2 in.) diameter.

5928 Table-Top-Studio ”digital” Includes RB 260 ”digital” Lighting Unit (5462), fitted with two compact fluorescents 11 W, 600 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B, for use with digital and video cameras. (Not available in 120 V) 5928/29: 5929 Table-Top-Studio ”digital plus” Same as 5928, but with camera clamp.

5997 Table-Top-Studio ”digital S-HF”

5460

5929

5997/98:

With RB 218 High-Frequency Daylight Lighting Unit (5454). Separate control box.

Lamps: 2 compact fluorescent lamps, 18 W each, 5400 Kelvin, CRI = 90-100.

5458

5998 Table-Top-Studio ”digital S-HF plus” Same as 5997, but with camera clamp.

5928

Shooting Tables

5998

5997

15

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 16

5930 TopTable-Set Three-piece set made up with components of the “TopTable“ small product table system. Consisting of basic table with transparent acrylic plate (5931), add-on table with clear acrylic plate (5932) and holding frame for accessories (5934).

5935 Base Stand For Small Product Table (5931). Permits the use of different types of lighting set-ups or larger light troughs underneath the small product table.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 310 x 480 mm (20.1 x 12.2 x 18.9 in.)

5931 Small Product Table 5930

5935

Compact product table for table-top photography and reproduction. Table top/background of transparent acrylic.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 615 x 480 mm (20.1 x 24.2 x 18.9 in.)

5932 Add-On Table

5934

Product table with clear acrylic plate to be set on the Product Table 5931 or to be used separately.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 415 x 405 mm (20.1 x 16.3 x 15.9 in.)

5933 Glass Add-On Table Flat product table for 5931 with glass top.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 160 x 405 mm (20.1 x 6.3 x 15.9 in.)

5931 5932

5934 Holding Frame 5933

16

For holding foils, clamp-on lamp holders or similar accessories with the included holding clamps. Attaches to Product Table 5931 and 5932. Dimensions (WxD): approx. 510 x 480 mm (20.1 x 18.9 in.)

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 17

5462 ”RB 260 digital” TopTable Lighting Unit Consists of two small softlights for even and smooth illumination. Interior reflector for high light output. Holding rods with multiple orientation possibilities, screw-on clamps for attachment, up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) clamping width. Lights can be switched separately.

Lamps fitted with 2 compact fluorescents 11 W, 6000 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B. (Not available in 120 V)

5877 „RL 160 digital“ Add-On Light Tiltable and rotatable reflector housing.

Interior reflector for high light output. 55 cm (21.7”) swan-neck table clamp with 35 mm (1.4”) range.

Lamp fitted with 11 W compact fluorescent tube, 6000 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B. Not available in 120 V.

5462/5877:

5460

5453-54 „RB 218“ / „RB 218 HF“ TopTable Lighting Unit Daylight-type lighting unit with two softlights for even and smooth illumination. Interior reflector for high light output. Holding rods with multiple orientation possibilities. Can be attached at various points with clamps ranging up to 48 mm (1.9”). Separate control box.

Lamps fitted with two 18 W compact fluorescents, 5400 Kelvin, CRI 90-100.

RB 218 HF Lighting Unit (5454) with additional high-frequency operating system.

5458

Shooting Tables

17

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 18

5940 TopTable Lighting Unit

3054

93324 Conversion Filter

5936 Holding Arm

5564 GNT Lamp Fittings

Consisting of two 100 watt halogen lights (5568) and a pair of holding rods (2 x 5936) for mounting the lights on the sides of the product table. The lights are focusable and individually dimmable down to about 20 %, with swan-neck holders. Operated with two transformers with integrated dimmers.

Mains cord: 2 x 4 m (13 ft.).

Halogen lamps: 2 x 12 V, 100 W, 3200 Kelvin Not available in 120 V. Safety front attachment with barn doors and safety glass for conversion from 3200 to 5500 Kelvin. For 5940. 1 piece.

For fastening the Lamp Fittings 5564 or the Flash/Light Holders 5574 to the ”topTable” Small Product Table. Also as an add-on to the ”topTable” Lighting Unit 5940. 1 piece.

(Mounting 5564 or 5574 requires two Holding Arms 5936.)

For use on the TopTable system. Is fastened at any point on the TopTable frame or with Holding Arms 5936. Two lamp fittings for photofloods with E 27 screw-in thread on swan-neck lamp rods.

Lamp capacity: 2 x 250 Watt max.

Cord: 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.), with cord switch

3127/28

5574 GNT Flash/Light Holders

For fastening conventional flashes or lights with accessory foot at any point on the TopTable frame or in connection with Holding Arms 5936.

With swan-neck holders.

18

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 19

5937 ”backlite 6000” Soft Light Source

5938

2405/25 ”prolite basic 2” Soft Light Source

2136, 2476

5054 Camera Clamp

5939 Diffusing Foil

Light box as a backlight source for TableTop-Studio ”digital” (5928) and Table-TopStudio ”digital plus” (5929) for use with TopTable Lighting Unit ”RB 260 digital” (5462) and Add-On Light ”RL 160 digital” (5877). Suitable for use with digital cameras and camcorders.

Illuminated area: 44 x 35 cm (17.3 x 13.8 in.)

Lamps: 2 x 15 W, 6000 K Replacement lamp: 5938 Dimensions (WxHxD): 504 x 91 x 431 mm (19.8 x 3.6 x 17 in.)

Light Box as a daylight type backlight source for ”topTable” product table system.

Illuminated area: 50 x 30 cm (19.7 x 11.8 in.)

Lamps: 2 x 13 Watt, 5400 K Dimensions (WxHxD):562 x 60 x 364 mm (22.1 x 2.4 x 14.3 in.) ”prolite basic 2 HF” Soft Light Source (2425) with additional high-frequency operating system.

55 cm (21.7 in.) long gooseneck arm for cameras up to 600 g (21 oz.), ball head with 30 mm (1.2 in.) base and 1/4” camera thread. Universal table clamp with clamp range up to 30 mm (1.2 in.) on boards or 55 mm (2.2 in.) on tubes.

For producing soft, shadow-free illumination.

Attaches to Holding Frame 5934 of ”topTable” product table.

Dimensions: approx. 250 x 75 cm (8.2 x 2.5 ft.)

Shooting Tables

19

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 20

Studio-out-of-the-Box

that makes it easy to use wider backgrounds. If the drawer is removed completely and turned upside down, it increases the length of the studio base by 30 cm/12”.

Digital photographers are the ones who, with growing enthusiasm, take pictures of small objects to include them on their website, improve their offerings with internet auctions or just archive their collections. More and more images are also included with e-mails.

Studio-out-of-the-Box was designed to be a multiple problem solver: Camera mounting, object positioning and background are handled ”out-ofthe-box”, and as an accessory there is also a lighting solution.

20

All will fit on your living room table - or wherever you want to place your temporary studio. Studio-out-of-the-Box is primarily a 30 x 45 cm/12 x 18” openprofile baseboard with a drawer and with a smart trapeze stand snuggling outside the baseboard. This makes it possible to fold it resulting in a rather compact unit that fits in the box.

The object is placed on the baseboard, the drawer holds a frame that unfolds to carry the included background roll. The background roll is only supported by the frame and

Opening the trapeze stand reveals its function: a camera mounted on the pivotable and relocatable platform can be positioned at any angle, any height and various distances from the object.

The trapeze stand can be easily adjusted and holds the camera in any position. When shooting vertically from a top-down position the camera platform can be locked by two sliding guide bars in a way that the vertical position will remain as the trapeze is rotated.

An optional lighting unit with two 25 cm/10” long tubes can easily be attached to the main table and will also fit in the box.

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 21

5911 Studio-out-of-the-Box Compact foldable studio for digital photography. Comprises table, background support, background material and trapeze stand for camera mounting.

On the trapeze stand the camera can be positioned in many different positions and in different height and distance from the object.

The camera platform is pivotable and relocatable and can be locked for vertical shooting position. Suitable for almost all digital compacts.

Table can be extended, background can be positioned in different heights. Background roll included, approx. 40 cm (4.3 ft.) wide and 130 cm (4.25 ft) long. To support wider backgrounds a clip-on rail is included.

Dimensions (folded): 585 x 57 x 330 mm (23 x 2.2 x 13 in.)

Supplied with carrying box: 605 x 485 x 100 mm (23.8 x 19.1 x 3.9 in.) (without handle)

5912 Studio-out-of-the-Box Lighting Set The set contains two lights, adjustable in height, pivotable and tiltable, mounted on tilting holding arms. There are two fastening points on each side of the table to attach the lights.

Lamps: Fluorescent tubes in pivotable sockets, approx. 25 cm (9.8 in.) long, 8 W, 2700 Kelvin, 8000 hours service life.

High frequency operation 30 - 40 kHz with integrated electronic ballasts.

Not available in 120 V.

5913 Replacement Lamp For 5912. 8 W, 2700 Kelvin. Without holding arms.

Not available in 120 V.

Shooting Tables

21

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 22

5883 ”Open Tube 1” Shooting Table

cm .

77 .3 in 30

13 51 2 cm .9 in.

5884 Lighting Module

This shooting table is pre-tailored from one single press board and is assembled by the user. The background made of flexible plastic material is inserted into the assembled table and fixed by velcro fittings. The evenly curved background (”open tube” outline) improves the distribution of light on the subject.

Side frames of the table provide attachment points for one or more lightung modules in vertical or horizontal position.

Dimensions (WxHxD, incl. background).

77 x 60 x 84.5 cm (30.3 x 23.6 x 33.3 in.)

For ”Open Tube 1” Shooting Table 5883.

One or more modules can be attached in horizontal or vertical position. Adapter for vertical attachment is included.

Aluminum housing with interior reflector, equipped with 36 watt daylight fluorescent lamp, high-frequency ballast, on/off switch and diffusor screen.

Reflector size: approx. 44 x 7.5 cm (17.3 x 3 in.)

5567

5880 ”Open Tube 2“ Shooting Table

cm .

50 .7 in 19

6 25 5 cm .5 in.

22

Miniature shooting table with a frame made of folded corrugated card board.

Background made of pre-cut card board.

The evenly curved background (”open tube” outline) improves the distribution of light on the subject.

This kind of ”single use” shooting table can be disposed with waste paper after damage or multiple use.

Dimensions (WxHxD, incl. background): approx. 50 x 30.5 x 43 cm (19.7 x 12 x 16.9 in.)

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

5875-76 „ConCave“ Background

Seite 23

Flat and flexible plastic plate with holes on both sides and tightening cord. The plate can be bent in the desired shape and then be fixed by means of two ”beads” and choice of respective holes.

Dimensions of flat plate: approx. 60 x 30 cm (23.6 x 11.8 in.)

5875: opaque plate for shooting with reflected light.

5876: transparent plate, for shooting with reflected and backlight.

5877 „ConCave“ Lighting Unit

Tiltable light with small interior reflector, table clamp and swan-neck holder. Equipped with compact fluorescent lamp 11W, 6000 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B, for use with digital cameras and camcorders.

Clamp range up to 35 mm (1.4 in.)

Swan-neck: 55 cm (21.7 in.) long Not available in 120 V.

5460

6320 Compressed Air Cleaner

Easy-to-use and environment-friendly compressed air cleaner with compressor, e.g. for service workshops and labs, studios and wherever dust has to be eliminated quickly and thoroughly. Quick-release connection for air hose. Adjustable pressure switch, display on pressure gauge. Automatic operation: Turns on automatically when the storage tank pressure is below 4 bar and automatically shuts itself off when full (at 6 bar). Very low noise level (30 dB/A at 1 m distance).

Safety valve, water separator.

For technical specifications see page 194.

Shooting Tables

23

01_Shooting Tables

25.06.2004 12:44 Uhr

Seite 24

6317 „Clear Gear“ Compressed Air

6318

9 x 6317

For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine mechanical and electronic equipment and components.

Compressed air in aluminum monobloc can.

With spray valve and flexible capillary tube for inaccessible places. Environment-friendly, without CFC, harmless for ozone, 100% nonflammable. No dangerous gas-air mixtures can arise. Trouble-free in operation. Gas pressure is stable until can is empty. Will keep indefinitely.

Contents: 200 ml, min.150 g (5.3 oz).

6381-82 Matt Spray

To remove undesirable reflections on shiny surfaces such as enamel, glass, plastic, high-gloss paint, chrome, etc. The photo matt-spray produces an even matt finish, dries quickly, adheres well and can be easily removed with water. 400 ml can.

6381: Transparent 6382: Black

6388 Adhesive Paste

Permanently elastic putty for holding, supporting and arranging photo objects. The putty can be formed at will and sticks to the object. It can be removed without leaving any residue.

Package with 250 g (8.8 oz.)

6678 „Xerapol“ Acrylic Glass Polish

Polish paste for removal of scratches from acrylic glass, e.g. at shooting tables or light boxes. Can also be used for acrylic glass on cars, motorcycles, trailers, furniture etc. Can not be used on matt acrylic glass surfaces.

Tube with 50 g (1.8 oz.) polish paste

6679 Acrylic Glass Cleaner

Environment-friendly special cleaning spray for acrylic glass. Supplied in pump spray bottle.

For more information see page 191.

24

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:55 Uhr

Seite 25

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

Seite 26

All-purpose Light Light is also indispensable for the ”photographic” vision. If natural light is not sufficient or does not lead to the desired result, ”artificial” light sources come into operation.

But the nature of this light is no longer ”artificial”. There are many light sources that provide daylight or can be adapted to daylight using conversion filters. Using specific type of film, but above all the features and possibilities of digital cameras, also allow for an adaptation to ”natural light conditions”.

When shooting specific objects the requirements for lighting may be complete opposites.

Light can be soft and even sometimes, while it can be harsh and strong other times, should avoid shadows or create shadows, should highlight edges or avoid reflections, should be directed to places difficult to access, should eventually be heat free or be ”subjectfriendly” in other ways - the list of requirements could go on and on.

The lamps themselves - their size, shape and technology - as well as the lighting units they are used in, determine one part of the illumination result, the other part is controlled by the position and the set-up of the lights, and is therefore based on the knowledge and skills of the ”lighting technician”.

Using flash makes high demands on the experience of the photographer.

With continuous light sources as presented in this catalog the illumination can be evaluated precisely before shooting, because set-up and shooting use the same light.

26

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

Seite 27

Halogen lighting units though are very compact and light-weight, they are easy to carry and are suitable for use ”on location”.

Soft Lights normally provide for very soft and even lighting. They are especially useful with object photography with shadowless illumination. They are equipped with daylight-type fluorescent lamps and can also be supplied for high-frequency operation. That is why they can be used with all kinds of digital cameras without any limitations, also with scanning cameras, and that is why they are often called ”digital light”. They can also be used in video applications and in connection with high-speed cameras. Their light is cool so there is only a minor thermal load on the object. All this, together with the long service life of fluorescent lamps, allows for extended operating times and long shooting sessions and therefore high performance. Color rendition remains constant over a long period of time and power consumption is rather low.

Lamps with screw-in thread, commonly known as photofloods, have been around for many years. They are used in reflector lights, the reflector itself can be fixed or exchangeable. The character of illumination is determined by the shape and the surface of the reflector.

All-purpose lamps found in homes, can be used, but their performance is worse compared with special photofloods. As generally known, the service life of incandescents is not very long.

These lighting units are especially useful for portrait shots.

Halogen lights have high light output and can cover wide spaces. Their light is harsh and contrasty and you can deliberately intensify contrast and shadows. In addition their light is ”hot”.

That is why in most cases lighting units are equipped with an extra cooling fan.

Close-up photography and photomicrography are the application fields of cold light sources using flexible fiber-optic light guides to get light exactly to a specific area.

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

If you have to photograph very small objects, halogen spots are extremely useful. They can be targeted to the object or just a part of it with the help of flexible gooseneck arms.

27

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

Seite 28

„proVision“ Soft Light For even and soft illumination, especially suitable for digital photography and video shooting.

Fitted with 55 watt daylight fluorescents with very low heat radiation. High-frequency operating system (approx. 40 kHz) for immediate ignition and flicker-free operation for unrestricted use with all digital camera systems including scanning cameras and scanbacks. High-gloss reflectors and intensifier barn doors for exceptionally high lighting efficiency. Light output can be dimmed down to 10% of maximum. Compact aluminum housing. Light is tiltable, with mounting frame for suitable stands/holding devices with 16 mm standard spigot.

Color temperature: 5400 K (3200 K on request) Service life of lamps: approx. 8000 h CRI: 90-100

3431 proVision 6.55 HF Lamps: 6 x 55 watt, 5400 K 4 barn doors, cable remote control (3m/10 ft.) for dimming.

Illuminating surface: 51 x 51 cm (20 x 20 in.)

Weight: 8.6 kg (18.9 lb)

3428 proVision 4.55 HF Lamps: 4 x 55 watt, 5400 K 4 barn doors, cable remote control (3m/10 ft.) for dimming.

Illuminating surface: 34 x 51 cm (13.4 x 20 in.)

Weight: 6,7 kg (14.8 lb)

3425 proVision 2.55 HF Lamps: 2 x 55 watt, 5400 K 2 barn doors, dimmer on lighting unit.

Illuminating surface: 17 x 51 cm (6.7 x 20 in.)

Weight: 4.4 kg (9.7 lb)

3454/64 Fluorescent Lamp Replacement lamp for 3425/3428/3431.

1 piece.

3454: 55 W, light color 12, approx. 5400 K 3464: 55 W, light color 32, approx. 3200 K

28

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

3433-35 Diffusion Screen

Seite 29

For use with ”proVision” soft lights.

Prismatic surface. 1 piece.

3433: for proVision 2.55 HF (3425) 3434: for proVisoin 4.55 HF (3428) 3435: for proVision 6.55 HF (3431)

3436-38 Soft Screen

For use with ”provision” soft lights.

Frosted surface. 1 piece.

3436: for proVision 2.55 HF (3425) 3437: for proVisoin 4.55 HF (3428) 3438: for proVision 6.55 HF (3431)

3439 Diffusion Foil

For use with ”provision” soft lights.

Can be cut to required size.

Dimensions: approx. 60 x 760 cm (2 x 25 ft.)

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

29

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

Seite 30

3061 “studiolight 2000“ 2000 W Safety Lighting Unit

3075 3094

3062 Conversion Filter

3032-34 Colour Filter

3035 Protective Screen

3045-46 Scatter Screen

3045-46

30

Complete insert for studiolight 2000.

Heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.

Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

Complete insert for studiolight 2000. For producing special colour effects. With handle.

Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3032: green 3033: red 3034: yellow

3062

3035

Halogen safety light for photo, filming and video shooting. With low-noise cooling for unlimited running and lengthened lamp life.

Four-flap gate attachment with safety screen and two lockable receiving slots for conversion filter, color filter, diffuser screen and scatter screens. Clip-on holders for filter foils on two barn doors. No light escapes at side due to special labyrinth design of the safety attachment frame. Thermostat for automatic cut-out when too hot. Temperature-resistant, tough reflector housing with carrying handles. Mouting bracket pivots by 210° for standing or hanging. Light steplessly tilts and locks in any position. 3/8“ stand thread.

Halogen lamps can be switched on separately and have separate fuses. Can be switched to setting light (2 x 500 watt). Diffuser screen and lamps in standard specification.

Technical data: Halogen lamp: 2 x 1000 W, 3200 K Cord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Weight: approx. 2800 g (6 Ibs. 3 oz.)

Dimensions approx. 190 x 215 (WxHxD): x 200 mm (7.5 x 8.5 x 7.9 in.)

Complete insert for studiolight 2000. Clear glass screen made of heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.

Dimensions: 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

Complete insert for studiolight 2000.

With handle.

Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3045: fine, mesh .52 mm 3046: coarse, mesh 1 mm

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

93375 “studiolight 1000“ 1000 W Safety Lighting Unit

93377 Conversion Filter

3017 Protective Screen

3075/3094 Halogen Lamp

Seite 31

Halogen safety light for photo, filming and video shooting. With low-noise cooling fan for unlimited operation and longer lamplife.

Attachment with pivoting four-flap gate and lockable receiving slot for safety screen, diffuser screen, colour filters and conversion filter. Clip-on holders for filter foils on two barn doors. Louvred ventilation slots to stop light escaping at sides. Variable focussing: the angle of light reflection can be varied steplessly from 50° to 90°. Thermostat for automatic cut-out when too hot. Temperatureresistant, tough reflector housing with carrying handle. Mounting bracket pivots by 210° for standing or hanging. Light steplessly tilts and locks in any position. 3/8“ stand thread.

Can be switched to setting light (500 watt).

Safety screen, diffuser screen and lamp in standard specification.

Technical data: Halogen lamp: 1000 W, 3400 K Cord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Weight: approx. 2100 g (4 Ibs. 10 oz.)

Dimensions: approx. 155 x 185 x (WxHxD) 230 mm (6.1 x 7.3 x 9.1 in.)

3075 3094

Complete insert for studiolight 1000.

Heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.

Dimensions: approx. 102 x 142 mm (4 x 5.6 in.)

Complete insert for studiolight 1000.

Clear glass screen made of heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.

Dimensions: approx. 102 x 142 mm (4 x 5.6 in.)

93377 3017

1000 W, socket GX 6,35.

3075: 3400 K, av. service life approx. 15 hours 3094: 3200 K, av. service life approx. 75 hours

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

31

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

Seite 32

93325 „videolight 4“ Safety Lighting Unit

Technical data: Halogen lamps: Fuses: Cord: Weight:

2 x 1000 W, 3400 K 2 x F 6.3 A 4 m (13ft. 1 in.) approx. 1500 g (3 Ibs. 5 oz.)

Dimensions (handle approx. 145 x 155 folded down): x 190 mm (WxHxD): (5.7 x 6.1 x 7.5 in.)

Height with handle: approx. 270 mm (10.6 in.)

3075

3029 Conversion Filter

3094

93304 „videolight 6“ Safety Lighting Unit

Technical data: Halogen lamp: Fuse: Cord: Weight:

1000 W, 3400 K F 6.3 A 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.) approx. 1300 g (2 Ibs. 14 oz.)

Dimensions (with approx. 100 x 140 handle folded down): x 190 mm (3.9 x 5.5 x 7.5 in.)

Height with handle: approx. 250 mm (10 in.)

3075 3094

32

3002 Conversion Filter

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming and video shooting. Extremely quiet blower cooling for unlimited operation in every position.

Four large light flaps for direct-aim lighting.

Front attachment with diffusor screen of heat-resistant safety glass for extra-soft lighting.

The upper part can be tilted steplessly for indirect lighting. The handle can be tilted through 180° and when mounted on a tripod assumes the function of a tilting head. For economical storing, the handle folds snugly onto the housing. Two stand threads 1/4“.

The lamps can be switched on separately and have their own fuses. Additional switch for modelling light (2 x 500 W). Supplied complete with camera bracket and lamps.

Complete safety front attachment with light flaps and conversion filter of safety glass for videolight 4 (93325).

Dimensions (W x H x D): approx. 145 x 135 x 70 mm (5.7 x 5.3 x 2.8 in.)

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming and video shooting. Extremely quiet blower cooling for unlimited operation in every position.

Thermostat for automatic shut-off if overheating. Heat-resistant housing. Front attachment with safety-glass diffuser plate for extra-soft lighting. Four large barn doors for direct-aim lighting.

The upper part can be tilted steplessly for indirect lighting. The handle can be tilted through 180° and when mounted on a tripod assumes the function of a tilting head. The unit can then be tilted upward and downward. For economical storing, the handle folds snugly onto the housing. Two stand threads 1/4“. Supplied complete with lamp and camera bracket.

Complete safety front attachment with light flaps and conversions filter of safety glass for videolight 6 (93304). Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 105 x 125 x 70 mm (4.1 x 4.9 x 2.8 in.).

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:56 Uhr

93307-08 „videolight 8“ Safety Lighting Unit

Seite 33

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming and video shooting. Unlimited continuous operation without extra cooling. Front attachment with diffuser made of safety glass.

Temperature-resistant reflector casing, for indirect lighting tilts upward by 90° with five click-stops. Slot shoe for mounting on camera. Thread 1/4“ for mounting on stand.

On/off switch.

93307: with four barn doors 93308: without barn doors Technical data: Halogen lamp: 300 W, 3400 K Fuse: F2A Cord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Weight: approx. 690 g (1 Ibs. 8 oz.)

Dimensions approx. 87 x 164 (W x H x D): x 135 mm (3.4 x 6.5 x 5.3 in.)

93318 Conversion Filter

93392 „videolight 150“ Safety Lighting Unit

Safety front attachment with barn-doors and safety glass conversion filter for videolight 8 (93307/08).

Dimensions: approx. 87 x 87 x 75 mm (3.4 x 3.4 x 3 in.)

3058 3038

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming and video shooting. Unlimited continuous operation without extra cooling. Four barn doors to direct the beam. Variable focusing: The angle of light emersion can be adjusted continuously from 40° to 90°. Two mounting possibilities: either flat on the housing - the light tilts by 25° - or raised on pivoting bracket. In this position the light can be tilted upwards and downwards by a total of 100°.

1/4” tripod thread. On/off switch.

Technical data: Halogen lamp: 150 W, 3400 K Fuse: F2A Cord: approx. 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Weight: approx. 600 g (1 lb 5 oz) Dimensions approx. 66 x 145 (100) x 125 (WxHxD): mm (2.6 x 5.7 (3.9) x 4.9 in.)

93391 Conversion Filter

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

Complete attachment with light flaps and conversion filter for videolight 150 (93392) and camlight 250 (93320).

3003

33

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 34

93356 „Mini“ Portable Lighting Kit 3058 3038

3047/3049 Portable Lighting Kit for 3047: 3058 3038

for 3049: 3075 3094 3047

Dimensions: approx. 385 x 265 x 100 mm (15.2 x 10.4 x 3.9 in.)

Complete light-stand-umbrella combination in carrying bag with handle and adjustable shoulder strap.

3047 Comprises ”videolight 8S” 300 W safety lighting unit (93307), light stand (5031), joint with umbrella mount (5041), mounting rod (1520) and white umbrella (1522).

3049 Comprises ”videolight 6” 1000 W safety lighting unit (93304), light stand (5031), joint with umbrella mount (5041) and white studio umbrella (3080).

3049

93359 „studio“ Portable Lighting Kit

3075 3094

34

Consisting of 300 W video light “videolight 8 S“ (93307), clamp (1512), reflector/shootthrough lighting umbrella (1522) and clamp (1520) in sturdy carrying case.

Complete lighting kit in strong case for easy access and safe carrying. Contains two “studiolight 1000“ lights (1000 W), two joints 5041, two light stands 5031, one studio umbrella and one holding rod 3084.

Dimensions: approx. 505 x 355 x 160 mm (19.9 x 14 x 6.3 in.)

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 35

3072 Portable Lighting System Complete lighting system consisting of: 2 „studiolight 2000“ fan-cooled 2000 W safety lights (3061), each one with two individually switchable 1000 W lamps, 3200 K, modelling light, four barn doors, diffusion screen and filter compartment, 2 fine scatter screens (3045) 2 coarse scatter screens (3046) 2 light stands (5031), 1 joint with reflector umbrella mount (5041), 1 mounting rod (3084), 1 reflector umbrella.

Packed in a strong aluminium case with additional pockets for further accessories.

Dimensions of case: approx. 520 x 420 x 230 mm (20.5 x 16.5 x 9.1 in.)

3075 3094

3070 Portable Lighting System Complete lighting system consisting of: 3 „studiolight 2000“ fan-cooled 2000 W safety lights (3061), each one with two individually switchable 1000 W lamps, 3200 K, modelling light, four barn doors, diffusion screen and filter compartment, 3 conversion filters (3062), 3 fine scatter screens (3045) 3 coarse scatter screens (3046) 3 light stands (5031), 2 joints with reflector umbrella mount (5041), 2 mounting rods (3084), 2 reflector umbrellas (3042).

Packed in a strong aluminium case.

Dimensions of case: approx. 720 x 420 x 230 mm (28.3 x 16.5 x 9.1 in.)

3075 3094

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

35

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 36

3132 Reflector Socket

Light-metal socket housing, can be swivelled steplessly, with holes and tightening screws for reflectors 3133-36. E 27 ceramic socket, steplessly adjustable for focussing. Mounting bracket with 3/8“ tripod bush.

Can be used with photofloods up to 500 W and E 27 socket all-purpose lamps.

Cord: 4 m (13 ft.)/120 V: 2 m (6 1/2 ft.), with cord switch.

31243130

3133/34/36 Interchangeable Reflector

3136

3134

3133

36

With attaching pins for reflector socket 3132.

White lacquered inner surface for soft lighting. Outer surface of non-reflecting dull black enamel.

3133: depth approx. 200 mm (7.9 in.), ø approx. 345 mm (13.6 in.)

3134: depth approx. 110 mm (4.3 in.), ø approx. 520 mm (20.5 in.)

3136: depth approx. 165 mm (6.5 in.), ø approx. 260 mm (10.2 in.)

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

3121 Studio Light

Seite 37

Reflector with white lacquered interior surface for soft lighting. Outer surface of nonreflecting dull black enamenl. Catch joint with tightening screw and 3/8“ tripod bush.

For photofloods up to 500 W and all-purpose lamps E 27.

Reflector diameter: 260 mm (10.2 in.)

Cord: 4 m (13 ft.)/ 120 V: 2 m (6 1/2 ft.), with cord switch Supplied without lamp 31243130

3124–30 Photoflood

With E 27 screw-in thread.

3124: 3125: 3126: 3127: 3128: 3129:

Opal Lamp 150 W, 3000 K Reflector Lamp 500 W, 3200 K 500 W, 3200 K, without reflector Reflector Lamp 250 W, 3400 K Reflector Lamp 150 W, 3200 K Reflector Lamp 500 W, 5000 K For use with daylight films 3130: 250 W, 3000 K, without reflector

3125

3129

3126

3127-28

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

37

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 38

Lamp Survey 3454/64 Dulux Fluorescent Lamps Replacement lamps for soft lights 3425/3428 and 3431.

Power: CRI: Average service life at steady color temperature: Socket: Length: Tube diameter:

55 W 90-100 8000 hours 2 G 11 533 mm (21 in.)

2 x 17,5 mm (0.69 in.)

Please replace fluorescent lamps as a whole set if requirements for color-correct lighting are high.

3454 Color temperature 5400 K, Light color 12, 1 piece 3464 Color temperature 3200 K, Light color 32, 1 piece

Code no.

Voltage

Power

Color temperature

Socket

Av. service life

suitable for

catalog page

Halogen Lamps

3027

6V

20 W

3200 K

G4

100 hrs

93302

151

3008

6V

35 W

3200 K

G4

50 hrs

93396, 93397

150

3028

12 V

50 W

3200 K

G 6,35

50 hrs

93310

152

3054

12 V

100 W 3200 K

G 6,35

25 hrs

3036

24 V

250 W 3200 K

G 6,35

50 hrs

93320

151

3003

230 V1)

150 W 3400 K GX 6,35

20 hrs

93392

33

3038

230 V2)

300 W 3200 K GX 6,35

75 hrs

93307, 93308

33

3058

230 V

300 W 3400 K GX 6,35

15 hrs

3094

230 V2) 1000 W 3200 K GX 6,35

75 hrs

3061, 93304,

30-32

3075

230 V1) 1000 W 3400 K GX 6,35

15 hrs

93325, 93375

1) 2)

38

1)

also available in 120 V and 240 V also available in 120 V

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 39

Stands, Umbrellas and Other Helpers The heavier and bigger the lighting unit, the more important the light stand.

It should stand firm, even when set to maximum height.

The stand should ”suit” the light, and a cheap solution could soon become an expensive one, if in case of a ”crash” the light or other things could be damaged.

Most of the lights have a mounting bracket or a tiltable grip in order to arrange for a specific position on the stand. Additional joints and holding devices provide easy attachment of umbrellas. They are important when light should not hit the subject with its full power or harshness. Very often the amount of light should be reduced to a certain value. Studio and reflector umbrellas are then of great help. The umbrella is mounted at the proper distance in front of the lighting unit.

Umbrellas with a black outside coating provide powerful, but diffuse reflection from the inside surface (= indirect lighting). A white inner coating gives soft, neutral reflections, a

silver inside surface leads to more accentuated effects and a gold coated reflector umbrella is the best solution for warm color rendition when shooting portraits or nudes.

The transparent white umbrella leads to similar results and can also be used for portraits. As the light is not only reflected but also transmitted, it can also be used for direct lighting.

In the end an umbrella provides for softer, shadowless and more even illumination.

If there is no room for placing stands, clamps and mounting accessories are valuable helpers to attach lights on shelves, doors or to tables.

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

39 39

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 40

5031 „Compact“ Light Stand Light-weight stand with five-section telescope centre column. Particularly suited for use in portable equipment kits. Solid flat metal legs.

Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads and with adapter sleeve for standard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made of black anodized light alloy.

Setting height: approx. 52–220 cm (20.5 - 86.6 in.)

Length closed: approx. 48 cm (18.9 in.)

Load: max. 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs) Weight: approx. 1000 g (2.2 lbs.)

5033 „Standard“ Light Stand Light-weight stand with four-section telescope centre column. Solid flat metal legs.

Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads and with adapter sleeve for standard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made of black anodized light alloy.

Setting height: approx. 88-250 cm (34.6- 98.4 in.)

Length closed: approx. 86 cm (33.9 in.)

Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs.)

Weight: approx. 1280 g (2.8 lbs)

5035 „Profi“ Light Stand

5031

Heavy-weight stand with three-section telescope centre column. Reinforced tripod base.

Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads and with adapter sleeve for standard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made of black anodized light alloy.

Setting height: approx. 104–290 cm (40.9 - 114.2 in.)

Length closed: approx. 101 cm (39.8 in.)

Load: max. 10 kg (22 lbs.)

Gewicht: approx. 2050 g (4.5 lbs.)

5035

5033

5048 Reversible Thread Pin 1”

8” 3/ ” 8

1”

5/

1/ ” 4

5048

40

Pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads. For 5031, 5033, 5035, 3402, 3403, 3404, 3421, 3423, 5044, 5041, 5027, 5028, 5043, 5045.

Pin is mounted to the light and is inserted into the 16 mm sleeve of the stand or mounting accessory.

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 41

3402 „Small“ Light Stand Four-part extending center column with air cushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centre column and legs made of polished aluminium tube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads.

Setting height: approx. 72–210 cm (28.3 - 82.7 in.)

Length closed: approx. 68 cm (26.8 in.)

Load: max. 3 kg (6.6 lbs.)

Weight: approx. 1400 g (3.1 lbs.)

3403 „Medium“ Light Stand Three-part extending center column with air cushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centre column and legs made of polished aluminium tube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads.

Setting height: approx. 99–244 cm (39 - 96.1 in.)

Length closed: approx. 91 cm (35.8 in.)

Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs.)

Weight: approx. 1700 g (3.7 lbs.)

3404 „Large“ Light Stand Four-part extending center column with air cushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centre column and legs made of polished aluminium tube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads.

Setting height: approx. 101–325 cm (39.8 - 128 in.)

Length closed: approx. 96 cm (37.8 in.)

Load: max. 10 kg (22 lbs.)

Weight: approx. 1850 g (4.1 lbs.)

3403

3404

3402

5049 Tripod Adapter For mounting devices with 1/4” tripod bush on tripods with 3/8” connecting thread. With 1/4” threaded pin and 3/8” threaded hole.

Height: approx. 27 mm (1.1 in.)

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

5049

41

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:57 Uhr

Seite 42

3421 Studio Light Stand Mobile and extremely stable light stand.

Folding tripod legs with fixable pivoting rollers. Centre column steplessly adjustable between 1.40 m and 2.30 m (4.6 and 7.5 ft.)

Hole for standard 28 mm (1.1 in.) pivot pin and with reducer to 16 mm (.6 in.).

Reversible thread insert with 3/8“ and 1/4“ mounting thread.

Setting height: Load: Weight:

approx. 140 - 230 cm (55.1 - 90.6 in.) max. 50 kg on centre (110 lbs.) approx. 6.8 kg (15 Ibs.)

3423 Studio Stand Mobile light stand for heavy-duty service (e.g. for proVision softlights), 28 mm (1.1 in.) vertical mounting hole, two horizontal mounting holes, 28 mm (1.1 in.) and 16 mm (0.6 in.). With adapter for 28 mm receptacle hole and 16 mm standard spigot with 3/8” thread. Crank operated height adjustment, with securing key and locking screw.

Setting height: 3421

Load: Weight:

3423

42

approx. 138-218 cm (54.3 x 85.8 in.) max. 30 kg/15 kg (66 lbs./33 lbs.) (vertical/horizontal) approx. 10.4 kg (22.9 lbs.)

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

3407 Background Support System

Seite 43

Complete system to support paper background rolls in widths of up to 275 cm (9 ft).

Consists of two stands, extendable to 3.25 m (10.7 ft.), and a 3-section horizontal pole to hold the background roll. The stands can also be used separately as light stands.

Complete kit in a carrying case.

5923 Background Cardboard Holder

Holds 110 to 270 cm (3.6 x 8.9 ft.) width background cardboard on rolls.

For mounting on tripods with 3/8“ thread.

Width: approx. 85 cm (33.5 in.)

5044 Universal Clamp with Extension Arm

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

Universal clamping device for boards up to 30 mm (1.2 in.), also suitable for attachment to tubes of 13 to 55 mm (.5 to 2.2 in.) diameter. Detachable extension arm with interchangeable 1/4“ and 3/8“ mounting threads.

43

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 44

5041 Joint with Umbrella Mount

Heavy-duty metal joint for attaching lighting units to stands. Upper section can be tilted and locked in any position. With hole (9.2 mm diam.) for reflector umbrella. Reversible 1/4“ and 3/8“ thread pin in upper section, reversible 1/4“ and 3/8“ thread sleeve in lower section.

Height: approx. 185 mm (7.3 in.)

1512 Clamp

For simple attachment of lightweight lighting units. Removable accessory shoe on ball joint. Tiltable to all sides in infinite steps, lockable in any position. Additional connecting thread 1/4“. With reflector umbrella holder ø 9.2 mm. Clamp is impact-resistant plastic with non-slip rubber studs.

Clamp span: max. 40 mm (1.6 in.)

Height: approx. 90 mm (3.5 in.)

3084/1520 Umbrella Mounting Rod

Allows attachment of the reflector umbrella precisely in the line of the lighting unit.

3084: For use together with 5041. Length: approx. 380 mm (15 in.), hole for umbrella: approx. 9.2 mm (.35 in.)

1520: For attachment of reflector umbrella 1522 in conjunction with clamp 1512.

Length: approx. 200 mm (7.9 in.), hole for umbrella: approx. 8 mm (.31 in.)

1522 Reflector Umbrella

White, waterproof coated nylon fabric. For use as a reflector and for shoot-through lighting with small lamps . Rods chrome or nickel-plated.

Diameter: approx. 37 cm (14.6 in.)

Height: approx. 30 cm (11.8 in.)

Rod-ø: approx. 7.9 mm (.31 in.)

44

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 45

3080 Studio Umbrella With white waterproof-coated nylon fabric.

Suitable as reflector or for shoot-through lighting. For use with lighting units and flash equipment. Chrome-plated rods, umbrella spoke tips of white plastic.

Umbrella diameter: approx. 90 cm (35.4 in.)

Height: approx. 58 cm (22.8 in.)

Rod-ø: approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3081 Reflector Umbrella For use with lighting units and flash equipment. Skin of PVC, chrome and nickel-plated rods.

Umbrella-ø: Height: Rod-ø:

3080

3081

approx. 80 cm (31.5 in.) approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.) approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3042–43 Reflector Umbrella For use with lamps and flash equipment. For particularly soft lighting, high reflection.

Outside black PVC fabric. Rods chrome or nickel-plated.

Umbrella-ø: Height: Rod-ø:

approx. 85 cm (33.5 in.) approx. 58 cm (22.8 in.) approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3042: inside silver coated for accentuated illumination 3043: inside gold coated for warmer colour reproduction

3042 3043

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

45

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 46

Being in a Tight Spot Especially when shooting smaller objects, accurate and controlled lighting can be a problem. An irregular shape might require light that bends around a corner, for example when covering openings or hollow spaces, or a spectacular production calls for an extremely precise set-up of several light sources.

Photographic documentation of technical subjects or image capturing of pieces of evidence require above all accurate rendition of details without any disturbing effects like shadows.

Small, flexible lights can be of great help in these cases. They do not need stands because they can be clamped to a convenient spot and a bendable gooseneck arm provides for exact positioning of the light. In the same way you may also attach reflectors, foils and even small and light-weight cameras.

And when you are definitely in a tight spot, then you can even get the light around the corner - with help of the light guides of a fiber-optic lighting system.

46

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

5960 20 W Halogen Light

Seite 47

With flexible arm, length approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.), 14 mm (0.55 in.) diam., standard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) power cable with integrated cable switch.

Includes halogen lamp 12 V, 20 W, 3100 K, 60° angle of illumination.

5966/81/87 Halogen Lamp

For 5960 and 5970 Halogen Lights.

12 V, 3100 K. 5981 20 W, 10° angle of illumination 5987 20 W, 38° angle of illumination 5966 20 W, 60° angle of illumination

5970 Halogen Light

5967-68/82-83/88-89 Halogen Lamp

For use with 20 W, 35 W and 50 W halogen lamps. With flexible arm, length approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.), 14 mm (0.55 in.) diam., standard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) power cable and dimmer with end-position switch-off. Supplied without lamp.

For 5970 halogen light. 12 V, 3100 K. 5982 35 W, 10° angle of illumination 5988 35 W, 38° angle of illumination 5967 35 W, 60° angle of illumination 5983 50 W, 10° angle of illumination 5989 50 W, 38° angle of illumination 5968 50 W, 60° angle of illumination

5027-28/5043 Clamp

To mount on tubes and boards.

Fits standard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin.

5027: Small table clamp, clamping width: 35 mm (1.4 in.).

Weight: approx. 160 g (5.6 oz.).

5027

5028: Large table clamp, clamping width: 80 mm (3.1 in.).

Weight: approx. 450 g (15.8 oz.).

5043: Universal clamp, to mount on tubes of 13-55 mm (0.5-2.2 in.) diameter.

Supplied with a wedge. Then can be mounted on approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.) thick boards. Weight: approx. 450 g (15.8 oz.).

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

5028

5043

47

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 48

5040 Magic Arm

5026/5038-39 Flexible Arm 5038

5039

5026

5045 Base for Flexible Arm

To mount and individually align cameras, lights and accessories. Mounted with reversible thread adapter on tripods and clamps with a 16 mm (0.6 in.) sleeve.

Mounting platform with sliding 1/4”.

Camera screw, 3/8”. conversion thread and reflector umbrella mount. Reversible thread adapter with 1/4” and 3/8” internal thread and with ball-and-socket joints at both ends.

Both ball-and-socket joints and the middle joint are released and tightened by a central locking disk. Max. load (in horizontal position): 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

Flexible holding arm with standard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin, 1/4“ mounting thread, black.

5026: Approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.) long, 14 mm (0.55 in.) diam., cable can be conducted through the arm. With knurled counter-locking disk.

Load (in horiz. position): approx. 200 g (7oz).

5038: Approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.) long, 12 mm (0.5 in.) diam., load (in horizontal position): approx. 180 g (6.3 oz).

5039: Approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.) long, 18 mm (0.7 in.) diam., load (in horizontal position): approx. 600 g (21.1 oz).

Base for 5026/38/39 Flexible Arms and 5040 Magic Arm. With 16 mm (0.6 in.) sleeve for standard pin. Variable leg distance up to 48 cm (18.9 in.) max.

Weight: 2.2 kg (4.8 lbs.)

5029-30 Clamp Adapter

For attachment of parts with circular profile, e.g. pen cameras, LED light sources, fiberoptic light guides etc. 1/4” connecting thread.

5029: for ø 7-18 mm (0.3 - 0.7 in.)

5030: for ø 15-25 mm (0.6 - 1 in.)

5046 Holding Clamp

48

Double clamp, 20 mm (0.8 in.) max. open width, to mount filter foils, reflectors, masks and other accessories.

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

3102 Clamp-on Lamp Holder

Seite 49

Gooseneck lamp rod, pivotable and variable adjustable. Shock-resistant plastic clamp with non-slip rubber cleats.

For lamps up to 250 W, E 27.

Clamp span: Lamp staff: Cord:

40 mm (1.6 in.) max. approx. 350 mm (13.8 in.) long 2.9 m (9 1/2 ft.), with cord switch

Supplied without lamp.

3127, 3128

3120 Clamp-on Lamp Holder

Lamp rod pivotable, tiltable, and adjustable in height. Plastic-coated non-slip metal clamp.

For lamps up to 250 W, E 27 Clamp span: Lamp rod: Cord:

60 mm (2.4 in.) approx. 250 mm (9.8 in.) long 1.5 m (4.9 ft.), with cord switch

Supplied without lamp.

3127, 3128

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

49

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 50

5945 „macrospot 1500“ Fiber-Optic Lighting System For pinpointed uniform and powerful lighting for macro and micro photography, for tabletop photography and for lighting inaccessible areas. Due to the very low heat development and high light yield, cold light is also widely used in microscopy, medicine, fine engineering etc. The two flexible, jointly detachable, glass-fibres optical light guides with swan’s neck sheathing can be moved into almost any position required. Angle of reflection approx. 67°. Two-stage switching for full and reduced lighting power, with constant colour temperature of 3200 Kelvin maintained.

Extremely low-noise fan cooling at the back of the light source, so subjects not exposed to heat. Only very slight heating of housing due to special heat-dispersing design.

Illuminated on/off switch.

Technical data: Halogen cold light mirror lamp:15 V, 150 W, 3200 K Cord: approx. 2.50 m (8.2 ft.)

Weight: approx. 4.8 kg (10 Ibs. 9 oz.)

Dimensions: approx. 230 x 115 x 205 mm (9.1 x 4.5 x 8.1 in.) (without handle) Length of optical light guide: approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.)

5946 Iris Diaphragm For adjusting the angle of reflection from approx. 38° to 20° minimum and simultaneous dimming by max. five stops. With slot for filter inserts. Can be mounted on light guide. One piece.

5952

5947 Focus Attachment 5948

For Reducing the angle of reflection to 38° approx. With slot for filter inserts. Can be mounted on light guide. One piece.

5948–49/5955 Filter Inserts 5946

5947 5949

50

Filter screen for insertion into iris diaphragm or focus attachment 5947.

5948: Conversion filter, 3 pieces 5949: Colour filter set, 3 filter screens each in red, blue, green, yellow 5955: Polarisation filter, 3 pieces

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

5941 Light Source

5952 Halogen Cold Light Mirror Lamp

5942–43 Optical Light Guide

Seite 51

Two-stage switching for full and reduced lighting power, with constant colour temperature of 3200 Kelvin maintained. Extremely low-noise fan cooling at the back of the light source. Illuminated on/off switch.

Replacement lamp for lighting system 5945 and light source 5941. 15 V, 150 W, 3200 K, average life approx. 50 hours.

For lighting system 5945 and light source 5941. 4 mm thick glass fibre cable with gooseneck sheath. The self-retaining optical light guide can be placed in almost any position. Length per optical light guide: approx.

50 cm (19.7 in.)

5942: 2-arm 5943: 3-arm

5944 Ring Light Attachment

Split ring light for especially homogeneous and shadow-free illumination of subject field.

For fastening to camera lenses from 35 to 60 mm (1.4 to 2.4 in.) diameter.

With flexible cord, approx. 75 cm (29.5 in.)

5951 Light Guide with Adapter

Lighting Units for Photo & Video

Two-arm gooseneck optical conductor with fastening adapter for the Kaiser TopTable product table system and for the rod links on most Kaiser copy lighting units (edge length 16 mm (.6 in.)). Flexible swan’s neck cord with plug-in connection for lighting system 5945 and light source 5941, length approx.

90 cm (35.4 in.).

51

02_Lighting Units

25.06.2004 12:58 Uhr

Seite 52

Video Lighting

Basically light does not care if it ”works” for a photo or film camera, a video or TV camera, a conventional or digital camera.

On the other hand some cameras ask for special lighting or, at least, for light with specific properties.

If a lighting unit is particularly light and compact and carries its own power source, it then is perfect for camcorders, analog and digital alike. These lighting units can be found in the ”Video Light” section starting on page 147.

52

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:10 Uhr

Seite 53

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:10 Uhr

Seite 54

The View from the Top When you think about the positions a camera is used in relation to the subject to be photographed, two possibilities come into mind: First there is the well-known posture with the camera - sometimes mounted to a tripod - in front of our eye aiming at the subject, either from the front, the side, from below or at an angle from above. The three dimensions of the subject are always preserved, the type of picture only depends from the chosen perspective.

Then there is the vertical view from above where usually the third dimension is lost.

But that is not important for this perspective. In fact this arrangement is for capturing subjects photographically, that are two-dimensional anyway or where surface, structure, pattern or array etc. is the point. This extends to the aerial photograph, that - taken from an absolute vertical position - will serve as a basis for the production of maps.

Back to earth, this camera position is often used for ”reproductions”. In general a reproduction is understood as a faithful rendition of a copy in a different scale. Even if the reproduction does not stay that ”faithful”, the copy has to be captured first in its original form.

Devices for reproduction or ”copying” are well known to all of us.

Photocopiers and flatbed scanners are such devices. Actually everybody who owns a camera has such a ”copying machine” provided that the lens will make a sharp picture at the necessary distance. ”If you want to do reproductions with an ordinary camera, the use of a -> stand or a copying device is indispensible.” (Urs Tillmanns, Photo Encyclopedia, Schaffhausen 1991).

And here we are, dealing with the subject.

54

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 55

As ”faithful rendition” is not always necessary any more, we should perhaps not speak of reproductions, but of a special way of ”image capturing”, because this has no meaning with respect to the rendition of the ”captured” subject. And this fits today’s digital photographic world much better.

Much of the ”capturing work” is done by the flatbed scanner, often limited to letter format sizes, but cameras will also find many fields of application here.

The height of the camera arm can be continuously adjusted on the column. In this way the desired frame and reproduction ratio can be set with high precision and consistent parallelism.

Depending on the size and weight of the camera, the size and nature of the original and other requirements there are camera stands in different sizes and lighting units in various configurations. Please read the next pages to get acquainted with the respective product families.

The indispensable stand for that purpose, the often equally essential lighting equipment and many more useful helpers can be found on the following pages. Only when copy stage and storage stage (film, chip or scan area) are absolutely parallel, all angles are exactly the same as the original is and the captured image is in accordance with the original’s geometry.

Therefore camera stands for image capturing applications must be stable and precise. They usually have a baseboard to carry the original (sometimes with an integrated lighting system for transparent originals), a column and a camera arm. Various lighting units are available for reflective originals.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

55 55

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 56

Family Relationships Combined with a suitable camera, stand and lighting equipment represent a complete problem solution for image capturing tasks. Kaiser has organized these camera stands and lighting units in different system families. We use the term �system� because all devices can be adapted to various requirements due to their modular construction and additional upgrade components.

56

Grouping the devices in families, links units and components that fit together and function together. Besides that, it helps to find the best choices for the specific requirements of the job.

Especially when choosing the light it is essential, that it is suitable and adequate. It is suitable when dimensions and stability match with the type of camera stand. That is why you will find the suitable lighting units always within the same system family.

The rePRO system

The Copylizer system

For professional requirements in conventional and digital image capturing

A universal capturing tool, especially for digital applications.

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 57

Many factors have to be considered when checking if the lighting equipment is adequate: size, nature and reflection properties of the photographic subject as well as the type of ”film” used in the camera. Especially with conventional chemical film the color temperature of the light should ”fit” the film: approximately 5000 Kelvin for daylight film, 3200 - 3400 Kelvin for artificial light film.

When using digital ”film”, that is in digital photography, new requirements can be important depending on the way, CCD elements are arranged (chip or line). Especially with line scanning cameras and cameras or backs using microscanning or multishot mode, there is a demand for high stability of the light. High-frequency lighting systems are the preferred solution.

The R1 system

The R2 system

The reprokid

High flexibility and extraordinary adaptability are the key features and enable even the accomplishment of very special jobs.

A ”amateur system”, also suitable for certain professional requirements.

Everything becomes smaller, lighter, more compact.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

57 57

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 58

A Survey to Begin with In the tables on these pages you will find all essential specifications of stands and lighting units for image capturing. They provide a quick survey and an easy comparison of selected data.

Most notably they comprise some important information for practical application: the maximum covered original width in relation to specific focal lengths of lenses as well as values of illuminance and feasible exposure time settings with the lighting units.

STANDS

1) 2) 3)

5232 5212 5211

100/40 100/40 100/40

LF 43x35/17x14 LF 43x35/17x14 LF 43x35/17x14

53/21 53/21 53/21

27/11 27/11 27/11

5276/5277/5280/5281 5276/5277/5280/5281 5270

Copylizer ini.tial

5206 5205

67/26 67/26

LF 20x18/8x7 LF 20x188/7

35/14 35/14

17/7 17/7

5266 5265

RSP rePRO

5612 mit 5615 und 5616/5617

150/60 66/26

88/35

44/17

5656

RSX RS 10 RS 1 RS 1 RS 1 microdrive

5512 5513 5510 5511 5507

120/47 100/40 100/40 100/40 100/40

60x50/24x20 60x50/24x20 45x50/18x20 45x50/18x20 45x50/18x20

66/26 53/21 53/21 53/21 53/21

33/13 27/11 27/11 27/11 27/11

RS 2 XA RS 2 CP

5411 5301

76/30 60/24

40x50/16x20 40x42/16x17

38/15 29/11

19/7 15/6

5454/5453/5462/5450 5454/5453/5462

reprokid

5360/5361

59/23

32x38/13x15

33/13

16/6

included with 5360

at maximum height focal length is related to 35 mm format (24 x 36 mm) in connection with 5560 holding rods

58

Suitable lighting unit

80x60/31x24, LF 48x43/19x17 5589/5590/5588/ 5558/5557/5556/ 5591/5595/5552/ 5554/55633)/55643)/ 55683)

Copylizer

Copylizer exe.cutive

Original width1 (cm/in) for focal length of lens2) 50 mm 100 mm

rePRO

Illumin. area (LF) or baseboard (cm/in)

R1

Column height (cm/in)

R2

Code no.

reprokid

Designation

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 59

5280, 5281 5276, 5277 5270 5266 5265

4 4 2 2 2

5656

RB 5056 HF

RB RB RB RB RB RB RB

3) 4)

5) 6)

5055 5004 5004 5000 5003 300 104

HF HF DL UV

5589/5590 5558/5588 5557 5556 5591/5595 5552 5554

RB 33)

5563

GNT

5564

3)

RL 100 Vario3)

5568

RB RB RB RB

5454 5453 5462 5450

218 HF 218 260 digital 2

R 2 CP

5303

reprokid

5360

Illuminance (Lux)4)

55 36 36 18 18

5400 5400 5400 5400 5400

4 x 55

5400

x x x x x

Time/ Aperture5)

Suitable stand

Lamp

7500 4700 1500 1160 1160

1/30 1/15 1/8 1/4 1/4

5232, 5212 5232, 5212 5211 5206 5205

3454 5567 5567 5458 5458

7900

1/30

5612 with 5615 and 5616/5617

3454

4 4 4 2 6 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

55 36 36 36 18 300 150 150 250 250 150 250 150 250 100

5400 7900 5400 4900 5400 3100 5400 1600 UV-A, wave length 366 nm 3200 9000 3000 9700 3200 3900 3000 20000 3400 13000 3200 5000 3400 15000 3200 5400 3400 15200 3200 8600

1/30 1/15 1/15 1/8 1/30 1/30 1/15 1/60 1/60 1/15 1/60 1/15 1/60 1/30

2 2 2 4 4 2

x x x x x x

18 18 11 75 150 11

5400 5400 6000 3000 3000 6000

1160 1160 1650 1400 3000 1650

1/4 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/15 1/8

5301, 5411 5301, 5411 5301, 5411 5411 5411 included

5458 5458 5460 43566) 31246) 5460

2 x 150 2 x 250

3200 3400

14000 31000

1/60 1/125

included included

31286) 31276)

5512, 5513, 5510, 5511, 5507

3454 5567 5567 5567 5569 3038 31246) 31286) 31306) 31276) 31286) 31276) 31286) 31276) 3054

rePRO

RB RB RB RB RB

4.55 HF 4.36 HF 2.36 2.18 HF 2.18

Color temp.

(Kelvin)

R1

Power (Watt)

R2

Code no.

reprokid

Designation

Copylizer

LIGHTING UNITS

in connection with 5560 holding rods measured with highest possible eveness of illumination in consideration of the adjustability on the lamp arms to the subject surface: tabloid format, R2 system and reprokid: letter format approx. exposure time in seconds at f=8 not included. 3127, 3128 are reflector lamps, 3124, 3130, 4356 are lamps without reflector

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

59 59

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 60

Professional in Every Respect When you need a maximum in stability, solidity and load capacity, the Kaiser rePRO system is the right choice.

reflective or transparent originals with digital cameras in line scanning, micro scanning or multi shot mode.

This system is not only at home in photo and video studios, but also in technology, forensics and science, education, research and media production.

Because of its extremely high level of stability the rePRO system is especially suitable to capture large format

The modular-designed stand includes a table with fixed working height and a column that is mounted to the rigid base. The optional lighting units also mount to the table. According to the job, the table can be equipped with a large base plate for reflective originals or with a trans-illuminator for transparent originals.

Height adjustment of camera level is motorized and works individually along the entire column via remote control.

The camera platform can travel up and down at two speeds, regardless of the supported load.

For precise positioning of the optical axis of the camera, the camera carrier can be shifted horizontally and, in addition, can be tilted by +/- 90 degrees.

The column, made of a multi-section special extrusion, is mounted to a firmly attached die-cast base and is extremely sturdy and vibration-resistant.

For reflective originals a compatible lighting unit is available.

This professional work station - equipped with a suitable camera system of your choice - offers optimum conditions for sophisticated image capturing tasks.

60

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 61

5612 Column Made of special aluminum tube, black anodized, with printed cm and inch scales.

Height adjustment motorized, with two speeds. Cable remote control. Constant adjustment speed, independent of load. Any height position is exactly held via self-limiting worm-gear. Automatic end switch by photo sensors. Camera platform horizontally adjustable by parallel guides with friction drive, hand cranks for right-hand/left-hand operation, two locking screws. Build-in spirit level.

Camera mounting plate 13 x 13 cm (5.1 x 5.1 in.), tiltable by +/- 90°.

Column height: 150 cm (60 in.)

Maximum load: approx. 15 kg (33 lbs.)

Mounting thread: 1/4” / 3/8” exchangeable

5615 Table Frame

5612

With aluminum die-cast base for 5612 column. Demountable steel tube construction.

Stacking tray 80 x 50 cm (31 x 20 in.) Heightadjustable feet.

Height without base: approx. 88 x 66 x 78 cm (34.6 x 26 x 30.7 in.), required floor space: 88 x 104 cm (34.6 x 41 in.)

5617

5617 Trans-Illuminator To be inserted in the 5615 table frame.

Illuminated area 48 x 43 cm (18.9 x 16.9 in.), glass cover plate. Total working area 80 x 60 cm 31.5 x 23.6 in.)

Lamps: 4 x 55 W. Built-in fan cooling, no thermal load on originals.

Luminance 6700 cd/m2, high-frequency operation. Color temperature of lamps 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, Average service life approx.

8000 hours.

5615

2414, 2487

5627 Close-up-Adapter Bracket to reduce the minimum camera-tobaseboard distance. Mounts on the camera carrier.

4421 rePRO-Adapter

5627

4421

For use of R1 system camera arms.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

61

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 62

5656 RB 5056 HF Lighting Unit Two light banks with high-gloss inside reflectors. Light emitting area 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.) each. Each bank is equipped with two 55 watt daylight fluorescent lamps, color temperature 5400 K, CRI = 90-100. All-electronic high-frequency operating system (approx. 40 kHz) for immediate ignition and flicker-free operation, can be used with line scanner, micro scanning and multishot digital cameras and backs. Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents.

Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width 15 to 55 mm (0.6 - 2.1 in.).

Separate control box. Lamps can be switched individually. Cord: 2.50 m (8 ft.)

5656

5592 Filter Holder Guide rails for slide-in filters for attachment to 5656. Two pairs.

5593 Diffusion Screens Fine-structured acrylic glass. Slides in 5592 filter holders. 2 pieces.

5616

5594 Polarizers Attaches to 5656 with help of 5592 filter holders. 2 pieces.

5616 Base Board To be inserted in the 5615 Table Frame.

Dimensions (WXD): 80 x 60 cm (31.5 x 23.6 in.). High-compressed wooden material, allside plastic-laminated, with printed grid and cm and inch scales. Includes slide-in carrier for control box of optional lighting unit.

3454

5614 Wall Mount

5614

62

For 5612 column. Lower part with base, spirit level and compartment for power supply.

Top section adjustable for vertical column positioning. Screws and dowels included.

Distance wall - column: approx. 35 cm (13.8 in.)

Distance wall - camera platform: approx.

51 - 73 cm (20.1 - 28.7 in.)

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:11 Uhr

Seite 63

eVisionary: The Copylizer Everywhere in industry and administration, in medicine, science and research, in the entire area of communication and information technologies, where photos and other originals have to be copied, catalogued, archived, processed or transformed, there is one thing you need apart from the camera system of your own choice: a Kaiser copylizer. It provides reliable camera mounting and suitable lighting

The stands can be used either with or without the respective side lighting units, as there are mounting provisions on all stands.

• for photographic and electronic capturing of subjects of any kind, including three-dimensional subjects, • for electronic documentation using digital or analogue camera systems, • for capturing documents, logos, symbols, photos and drawings for further processing in DTP systems or for further use in video conferences or online networks, • for reproducing and documenting Xray films, large format slides, silhouetted subjects and transparent objects, • for making presentation slides, • as a video presenter in schools and universities, at training courses and meetings, in advertising, industry, medical imaging and for use by military and public authorities, • for integration into evaluation systems for quality testing and monitoring in industry labs.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

63 63

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 64

5211/12/32 Copylizer eVision exe.cutive/ eVision exe.cutive HF Camera stand with integrated transmitted light source. Illumina base with four 13 W daylight fluorescents 5400 K, illuminated area 43 x 35 cm (16.9 x 13.8 in.). Illuminance 3300 cd/m2. Mounting fixtures for optional side lighting unit. Height-adjustable feet.

Base with spirit level. 70 mm (2.8 in) wide high-stability, vibration-resistant column made of special aluminum tubing, matt black anodized, with cm and inch scales.

Hand-crank operated height adjustment of camera arm by friction drive on plastic bearings. Weight compensation by integrated coil spring, RTP camera arm with horizontally adjustable camera platform, camera body positioning device and interchangeable 1/4� and 3/8� threads.

Illumina base (WxD): 63 x 55 cm (24.8 x 21.7 in.)

Column height: 1 m (40 in.)

Max. load: approx. 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

Mains cord: 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)

5211: Mains frequency operation Not available in 120 volt 5212: Illumina base with high-frequency operation system (approx. 40 kHz) for flicker-free operation, especially important for use with digital scanning cameras.

5232: Illumina base with high-frequency operation system, dimmable.

106 cm / 41.7 in.

2136, 2477

13.5-21.8 cm 5.3-8.6 in.

43 cm 16.9 in.

64

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 65

5276/77/80/81 RB 4.36 HF/RB 4.55 HF Copylizer Lighting Unit Lighting unit consisting of two light banks and lamp arms. Lamps can be tilted, shifted and adjusted in height. Vertical arms with height markings, tiltable with detents.

Connects to and is operated via copylizer illumina base. Lights with high-gloss inside reflectors for high light output plus filter holder and diffusion screen. High-frequency operating system (approx. 40 kHz) for universal use with digital applications.

5276: Lamps: 2 x 36 w each, daylight fluorescent lamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, light emitting area approx. 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5277: same as 5276, but with dimmable lights 5280: Lamps: 2 x 55 w each, daylight fluorescent lamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, light emitting area approx. 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5281: same as 5280, but with dimmable lights

5270 RB 2.36 Copylizer Lighting Unit Lighting unit consisting of two light banks and lamp arms. Lamps can be tilted and adjusted in height, with filter holders and diffusion screens. Vertical arms with height markings, tiltable with detents. Connects to and is operated via copylizer illumina base.

for 5270, 5276-77:

Lamps: 1 x 36 w each, daylight fluorescent lamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, light emitting area approx. 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

for 5280/81:

3454

5567

5256 Clamp Base For attaching lighting units 5265/5266/5270/ 5276/5277/5280/ 5281 to regular boards up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) thickness.

2 pieces.

5270

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

5256

65

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 66

5241/42/62 Illumina Base Can be combined with components of the Kaiser R1 system. Trans-illuminator with four 13 w daylight fluorescent lamps 5400 K, illuminated area approx. 43 x 35 cm (16.9 x 13.8 in.), illuminance approx. 3300 cd/m2.

Optional side lighting units can be attached, connected and operated. Height-adjustable feet. Base with spirit level for 70 mm (2.8“) wide column.

Outside dimensions (WxD): approx. 63 x 55 cm (24.8 x 21.6 in.)

Mains cord: approx. 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)

5241: Mains frequency operation.

Not available in 120 volts 5242: High-frequency operation (approx.

40 kHz) for universal use with all digital applications.

5262: same as 5242, lights dimmable.

2136, 2477

Accessories for 5211/12/32 Copylizers and 5241/42/62 Illumina Bases 5292 Pressure Plate. Made of high-quality crystal glass to press „wavy“ originals. Can be fitted to the hinge of the illumina base and is easily lifted. With adjustable stop guides.

5294 Metal Plate. For holding originals with magnetic holders (four included) and as a protective cover of the acrylic glass plate.

Can be fitted to the hinge of the illumina base and is easily lifted. With printed grid for positioning and adjustable stop guides.

5296

5296 Masking Frame. With adjustable masks to prevent influence of stray light when capturing smaller transparent originals between 24 x 36 mm (35 mm slide) and 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7“). Can be fitted to the hinge of the illumina base and is easily lifted.

5292 5294

66

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 67

73 cm / 28.7 in.

5205-06 Copylizer eVision ini.tial/ eVision ini.tial HF

11.7 cm 4.6 in.

33.5 cm 13.2 c in.

2146, 2475

5265-66 RB 2.18 / RB 2.18 HF Copylizer Lighting Unit

Camera stand with integrated trans-illuminator.

Illumina base with four 8 W daylight fluorescents 5400 K, illuminated area 20 x 18 cm (7.9 x 7.1 in.). Illuminance 4600 cd/m2.

Mounting fixtures for optional side lighting unit. Height-adjustable feet. 70 mm (2.8 in) wide high-stability, vibration-resistant column made of special aluminum tubing, matt black anodized, with cm and inch scales.

Hand-crank operated height adjustment of camera arm by rack-and-pinion drive and additional fine drive. Weight compensation by integrated coil spring, RA 101 camera arm with camera body positioning device and interchangeable 1/4” and 3/8” threads.

Illumina base (WxD): 32 x 45 cm (12.6 x 17.7 in.)

Column height: 67 cm (26 in.)

Max. load: approx. 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

Mains cord: 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)

5211: Mains frequency operation.

Not available in 120 volt 5212: Illumina base with high-frequency operation system (approx. 40 kHz) for flicker-free operation, especially important for use with digital scanning cameras.

Lighting unit consisting of two lights and holding arms. Lamps can be tilted and adjusted in height, vertical arms tiltable with detents.

Lamps: 1 x 18 w each, daylight fluorescent lamp 5400 K. Separate control box.

5265: Mains frequency operation 5266: High-frequency operation (approx. 40 kHz)

5458

5298 Metal Plate

For 5205 and 5206 Copylizer. For holding originals with magnetic holders (four included) and as a protective cover of the acrylic glass plate. Can be fitted to the hinge of the illumina base and is easily lifted.

Stative + Beleuchtungen für die Bilderfassung

67

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 68

The Power of Possibilities The R1 system is a powerful system. It is universal, sophisticated, flexible, versatile, multi-functional and adaptable.

It is designed for professional users and dedicated photographers and offers high stability, angular precision and quality workmanship.

It is ideal for use with conventional and digital camera systems up to 4 kg (8.8 lbs.) total weight and offers a vast range of components and accessories.

Base boards of various sizes, columns of different height, camera arms with a variety of adjustment options, lighting units with various lamps and reflectors, working at different power levels, with various mounting and adjustment options make it possible to adapt the units to individual requirements.

This system is completely modularized and therefore allows also customized configurations.

68

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 69

5512 RSX Camera Stand Big non-reflecting matt grey baseplate with printed grid, cm and inch scale. Feet adjustable in height. Spirit level in column base.

Especially wide and low-vibration column made of matt black anodized aluminium tubing with cm and inch scale. Height adjustment with hand crank and rack with extra weight compensation by integrated coil spring. Blocking screw to stop accidental changing of height. RTX camera arm with adjustable and pivotable camera holder.

Camera can be mounted forwards or backwards. Camera platform can be horizontally adjusted by fine mechanism.

Interchangeable 1/4�/ 3/8� mounting thread.

Including dust hood.

125.5 cm / 49.4 in.

Baseplate: approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Height of column: 1.20 m (4 ft.)

Loading capacity: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs.) max.

18-31 cm 7.1-12.2 in.

43 cm 16.9 in.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

69

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 70

5513 RS 10 Camera Stand Large non-reflecting, matt grey baseboard with a printed fine grid and cm/inch scale.

Height-adjustable feet. Spirit level integrated into the base. Especially wide, virtually vibration-free column made of matt black anodised aluminium section tube with cm/inch scale. Hand-cranked, rack-and-pinion height adjustment, additionally counter-balanced by a built-in scroll spring. Locking screw prevents inadvertent changing of the adjusted height. RTP camera arm (5524) with precision, parallel-guided horizontal adjustment over approx. 8 cm (3.1 in.). Reversible mounting thread 1/4�/ 3/8�. Including dust cover.

105.5 cm / 41.5 in.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 600 x 32 x 500 mm (23.6 x 1.3 x 19.7 in.)

Column height: approx. 1 m (39 in.)

Maximum load: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

15.5-23.8 cm 6.1-9.4 in.

43 cm 16.9 in.

5508 Base Stand For converting RS1 system camera stands from table to free-standing model. Also suitable for all Kaiser baseboards from 45 x 50 cm to 60 x 80 cm (17.7 x 19.7 in. to 23.6 x 31.5 in.). Height-adjustable feet. Slide-in compartment for control box of optional lighting unit. Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

580 x 510 x 595 mm (22.8 x 20.1 x 23.4 in.)

70

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 71

5510–11 RS 1 Camera Stand Non-reflecting matt gray base board with printed fine grid. Feet adjustable in height.

Spirit level in column base. Extra-wide and extremely vibration-resistant column of dull black anodized aluminium tubing with cm and inch scales. Hand crank-operated height adjustment by friction drive on plastic bearings. Weight compensation by roll-off spring mechanism.

Base board: approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Column height: approx. 1000 mm (39.4 in.)

5511 RS 1 Camera Stand With RT 1 copy and titling arm with two camera fastening points. Interchangeable threaded bush 1/4”/ 3/8”. Camera carrier pivots and slides horizontally.

Maximum load: 3 kg (6.6 lbs.)

5510 RS1 Camera Stand With RA 1 camera arm with interchangeable threaded bush 1/4”/ 3/8” and camera adjustment device.

Maximum load: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

23-31.8 cm / 9.1-12.5 in.

43 cm / 16.9 in.

5510 105 cm / 41.3 in.

105 cm / 41.3 in.

5511

18.5 cm 7.3 in.

5510

43 cm 16.9 in.

5511

5507 RS 1 „microdrive“ Camera Stand Same as RS1 Camera Stand (5510), but with hand-cranked, rack-and-pinion height adjustment, additionally counter-balanced by a built-in scroll spring. Additional fine drive with 1:10 step-down transmission for superfine adjustment. Locking screw prevents inadvertent changing of the adjusted height.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

71

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 72

5589-90 RB 5055 HF Lighting Unit Cold-light unit with two light banks, each one fitted with two daylight fluorescent lamps, high-gloss inside reflectors and highfrequency operating system. Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)

Separate control box.

Lamps: 4 x 55 watt Color temperature: 5400 K Color rendition index: CRI = 90-100 (1A) Light emitting area: 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5589: continuously dimmable down to 10% 5590: not dimmable

3454

5591/95 RB 5003 UV / RB 5003 UV-HF Lighting Unit UV lighting unit with two light banks, each one fitted with three UV-A fluorescent lamps for applications in UV and fluorescence photography. Lights can be tilted and shifted.

Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents.

Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) Separate control box.

Lamps: 6 x 18 watt UV-A Wave length: 366 nm Light emitting area: 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5591: Mains frequency operation 5595: High-frequency operation (approx. 40 kHz)

5569 UV-A Fluorescent Lamp 18 watt, average service life 8000 hours, G 13 socket, length 590 mm. 1 piece.

72

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:12 Uhr

Seite 73

5557-58/5588 RB 5004/RB 5004 HF Lighting Unit Cold-light unit with two light banks, each one fitted with two daylight fluorescent lamps. Lights can be tilted and shifted.

Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents.

Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.).

Separate control box.

5557

Lamps: 4 x 36 watt Color temperature: 5400 K Color rendition index: CRI = 90-100 (1A) Light emitting area: 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5558/5588

5557: Mains frequency operation 5558: High-gloss inside reflectors and highfrequency operating system (40 kHz) 5588: High-gloss inside reflectors and highfrequency operating system (40 kHz), continuously dimmable down to 10%.

5567

5556 RB 5000 DL Lighting Unit Cold-light unit with two light banks, each one fitted with one daylight fluorescent lamp.

Lights can be tilted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height.

Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents. Mounted with strong diecast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.).

Lamps: 2 x 36 watt Color temperature: 5400 K Color rendition index: CRI = 90-100 (1A) Light emitting area: 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5567

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

73

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 74

5582/92 Filter Holders

Guiding rails to attach slide-in filters to Kaiser camera stand lighting units. 2 pairs.

5582: For reflector size 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.) (5556-58/5588) 5592: For reflector size 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.) (5589-91/5595)

5583/93 Diffusion Screens

Fine-structured acrylic glass. Mounts to camera stand lighting units in connection with 5582/92 Filter Holders. 2 pieces.

5583: For reflector size 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.) (5556-58/5588) 5593: For reflector size 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.) (5589-91/5595)

5592 5593

5594 Polarizers

Mounts to lighting units 5556-58, 5588-91, 5595 in connection with 5582/92 Filter Holders. 2 pieces.

Dimensions: 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.), can be trimmed to 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5594

Fluorescent Lamps

8W

74

13 W

18 W

36 W

55 W

Replacement lamps for rePRO, Copylizer and R1 system. Daylight fluorescent tubes.

Color temperature 5400 K, light color 12, color rendition index CRI=90-100.

Average service life: approx. 8000 hours with constant color temperature. For critical requirements on color-correct reproduction replace fluorescents replace in sets.

Code

Power

Socket

Length (w/o pins) mm/in

Tube 2146 shape 2475 2136 2477

8W 8W 13 W 13 W

G G G G

288 288 517 517

Dulux 5458 5567

18 W 36 W

2 G 11 2 G 11

2414 2487 3454

55 W 55 W 55 W

2 G 11 2 G 11 2 G 11

5 5 5 5

mm mm mm mm

Tube-ø (mm)

Qty. (pieces)

fits

16 16 16 16

1 4 1 4

5205-06 5205-06 5211/12/32/41/42/62 5211/12/32/41/42/62

217 mm 411 mm

2 x 17,5 2 x 17,5

1 1

533 mm 533 mm 533 mm

2 x 17,5 2 x 17,5 2 x 17,5

1 4 1

5265-66 5270, 5276-77, 5556-58, 5588 5617 5617 5280-81, 5589-90, 5656

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

5552 RB 300 Lighting Unit

Seite 75

With two convestion-cooled halogen lights.

Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.). Lights can be switched separately. Lamps included.

Lamps: 2 x 300 Watt Color temperature: 3200 Kelvin Cord: 2 x 4 m (2 x 13.1 in.)

3038/3058 Halogen Lamp

For RB 300 Lighting Unit. 300 W. 3038: 3200 K, 7300 lm, average service life approx. 75 hours, 1 piece.

3058: 3400 K, 8500 lm, average service life approx. 15 hours. 1 piece.

5554 RB 104 Lighting Unit

With four reflector lights with E 27 screw-in socket, suitable for photofloods up to 250 watt. Lights can be switched separately.

Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted continuously in height. Vertical lamp arms with height markings, tiltable with detents. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) Reflector-diameter: approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.). Cord: 2 x 2 m (2 x 6.5 in.).

Supplied without lamps.

Recommended lamps: 3124: Opal lamp 150 W, 3000 K 3130: Photoflood 250 W, 3000 K (without reflector) 3128: Reflector lamp: 150 W, 3200 K 3127: Reflector lamp: 250 W, 3400 K

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

75

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 76

5560 Lamp Arms

5563 RB 3 Lamp Fixtures

Complete set for two or four lights. The arms are adjustable in height and angle and can be fitted with 5563 and 5564 Light Fixtures, with RL 100 Vario Lights (5568) and with Flash/Light Fixtures 5571 and 5574. Clamp attachment on boards up to 48 mm (1.9 in.).

For use with 5560 Lamp Arms.

Lamps: Cord:

2 x 250 W max., E 27 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.) with cord switch

2 pieces, without lamps.

3127/28

5571 Flash/Light Fixtures

76

For fastening conventional flashes or lights with accessory foot or 1/4� mounting thread to holding rods with 16 mm (.63 in.) square tube, e.g. the 5560 Lamp Arms.

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

5568 RL 100 Vario Lights

Seite 77

For use with the 5560 Lamp Arms and all other Kaiser camera stand lighting units with holding rods with and edge length of 16 mm (.63 in.).

Two focussable 100 watt halogen lights, separately dimmable down to approx. 20 watt, with gooseneck holders. Operated with two transformers with integrated dimmer.

Specifications: Halogen lamps: 2 x 12 V, 100 W, 3200 K Cords: 2 x 4 m (13 ft.)

3054

93324 Conversion Filter

5564 GNT Lamp Fittings

3127/28

5574 GNT Flash/Light Fixtures

Not available in 120 V.

Safety front attachment with conversion filter and barn doors. For RL 100 Vario Lights.

Converts 3200 K to 5400 K.

For use with the 5560 Lamp Arms and with other Kaiser camera stand lighting equipment with holding rods with and edge length of 16 mm (.63 in.). Two lamp fittings for photo lamps with E 27 screw-in thread on gooseneck lamp rods. Without lamps.

Lamps: 2 x 250 Watt max.

Cords: 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.) with cord switch

For fastening conventional flash units or lights with accessory foot to the 5560 Lamp Arms or to other holding rods with 16 mm (.63 in.) edge length. With gooseneck holders.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

77

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 78

Choice and Realization Within the realm of possibilities inherent in the R1 system, choice and realization must not be too far apart.

The high degree of modularization, the vast range of components and the uncomplicated design of the „interfaces“ provide for so many variations and versions, that there is hardly a requirement that can not be met.

78

Larger base boards, metal magnetized surfaces, longer or shorter columns, camera armes with various positioning and adjustment possibilities - all this combined with the many options in lighting equipment will lead to a big choice in practical solutions, which can even be adopted later on to modified requirements.

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 79

5517–19 Base Board Matt grey laminated base board with mounted base for attaching column. Printed fine grid with cm and inch scale. Spirit level in base. Individually height-adjustable feet.

Dimensions (WxDxH): 5517: approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

5518: approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

5519: approx. 800 x 600 x 32 mm (31.5 x 23.6 x 1.3 in.)

(Dimensions excluding base and feet)

5518 5519

5517

5541–42 Metal Baseplate Metal base plate for base boards of camera stands and enlargers. Surface with 18 % reflecting matt grey finsih for easy determination of exposure for copy work. Marked with grid lines with 1 cm (.4 in.) line intervals and cm and inch scales.

Material thickness: 1.25 mm. Non-slip underside. Including four round magnetic original holders with 32 mm (1.3 in.) diameter for fastening originals or photo paper during enlarging.

5541: Size of marked grid area: 40 x 35 cm (15.7 x 13.8 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 454 x 15 x 430 mm (17.9 x .6 x 16.9 in.). Fits on all 45 x 50 cm (17.7 x 19.7) base boards.

5542: Size of marked grid area: 55 x 35 cm (21.7 x 13.8 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 604 x 15 x 430 mm (23.8 x .6 x 16.9 in.). Fits on all 60 x 50 cm (23.6 x 19.7 in.) base boards.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

79

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 80

4473-76/4408-09 Column

Wide and extremely vibration-resistant column of aluminium tubing with dull black anodized surface and cm and inch scales.

With mount and fastening mechanism for camera arms. Height adjustment by hand crank.

Cross-sectional dimensions of the column: 70 x 35 mm (2.8 x 1.4 in.)

4473: Height adjusted by friction gear with plastic bearings, without weight compensation, height 1 m (40 in.)

4474: Height adjusted by friction gear with plastic bearings, weight compensated by built-in roller spring, height 1 m (40 in.)

4475: Height adjusted by gear rack with weight compensation by built-in roller spring, additional 1:10 fine drive.

Locking screw for fixing height adjustment. Height 1 m (40 in.)

4476: same as 4475, but without fine drive.

4408: Height adjusted by gear rack, weight compensated by built-in roller spring, locking screw for fixing height adjustment. Height 1.2 m (47 in.)

4409

4408

4476

4475

4409: Height adjusted by friction gear with plastic bearings, weight compensated by built-in roller spring, locking screw for fixing height adjustment. Height: 1.5 m (60 in.)

4474/73

4412 Wall Mount

Sturdy wall mount for all R1 system columns. Wall mounting with 6 screws.

Upper part adjustable for absolutely vertical position. Lower part with base and spirit level. Entire height with 1 m column: 1.16 m (3 ft. 10 in.).

Distance wall - front edge of mount (without camera arm): approx. 25 cm (9.8 in.)

Supplied with screws and dowels.

80

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

5528 Object Carrier

Seite 81

To take small objects or flat originals lit from back and/or top. Consisting of 368 x 475 mm (14.5 x 18.7 in.) glass sheet in pivoting frame. Complete object carrier pivotable and adjustable in height. Glass sheet replaceable with translucent acrylic glass (included).

Suitable for all 70 mm (2.8 in.) wide columns with separate mount (included).

External dimensions of frame (WxHxD): approx. 555 x 30 x 425 mm (21.9 x 1.2 x 16.7 in.)

4455 Extension Arm

To extend the camera arm mount. Required for capturing large originals. This increases the distance between the optical axis of the camera lens and the column base by 80 mm (3.2 in.), if the extension arm is attached between the mount and the camera arm.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

81

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 82

5522 RTX Camera Arm

Camera mount with spirit level for fine adjustment. Turns ± 180° and can be fixed in every position. Camera can be mounted on front or rear. Camera mount horizontally adjustable with fine adjustment.

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8”. mounting thread.

190

175

45-

mm

225

mm

95-

5521 RT 1 Copy And Titling Arm

110

mm

Camera fastening points for horizontal and upright formats, with interchangeable threaded bush 1/4”/ 3/8”. and rubber rests.

A parallel guide makes the camera platform longitudinally adjustable, and it can be locked in any position. The entire copy and titling arm is tiltable to allow for reproduction of vertical subjects.

0 -22 m 132 5m -23 7 14

5524 RTP Camera Arm

70 mm

88

mm

Horizontally adjustable via parallel guides to change the distance to the column. Moves approx. 8 cm (3.1 in.) back and forth.

Camera positioning device, adjustable to different camera bodies.

Reversible mounting thread 1/4”/ 3/8”.

155

mm

71-

5520 RA 1 Camera Arm

Device for adjusting the camera, can be set to different camera bodies.

90 mm

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.

90

82

mm

100

mm

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

5523 RA 101 Camera Arm

Seite 83

Specially suitable for cameras with large distance between tripod hole and optical axis of lens. Device for adjusting the camera, settable to different camera bodies.

145 mm

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.

90

45

mm

5539 RLR Camera Arm

Camera platform can be shifted horizontally to left or right and and can be blocked in any position. Adjustable stops for end position of camera. Camera can be mounted for horizontal or vertical format. Especially suitable for use with 5904 Book Holder when copying books page by page.

114 mm

73

mm

Camera platform moves approx. 15 cm (6 in.) from center to each side.

51 mm

400

mm

5540 2CC Camera Arm

Similar to 5539, but with two camera carriers which can be adjusted separately. For mounting two cameras, e.g. for comparison shots.

114 mm

73

mm

51 mm

400

mm

5531 Focusing Stage

Extremely flat focusing stage with fine drive with spindle. Rapid adjustment with single lever lock. Locking screw. Setting range 120 mm (4.7 in.) with mm scale. Large camera platform with non-slip surface and interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.

1/4”/ 3/8” tripod thread. Made of black anodized aluminum.

232

mm

21 mm

105 mm

Two focusing stages can be combined for crossed stanges.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

83

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 84

Lightweight Class With digital photography cameras become smaller and lighter. Even if the loads are less - the requirements on stability have not changed.

Camera stands and lighting units of the R2 family are „light“ versions of the R1 system. Designed for light-weight cameras, their dimensions and stability are related to the respective needs.

The stands are not only for the majority of digital cameras, compacts and smaller SLRs, but are also suitable for industrial CCD and CMOS cameras.

There is also a range of suitable lighting units: from high-frequency fluorescents to basic tungsten lamp lighting.

84

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 85

5411 RS 2 XA Camera Stand Non-reflective matt grey baseboard with printed fine grid and cm/inch scale. Mattblack anodised aluminum section tube column with cm/inch scale. Hand-cranked height adjustment by friction drive in plastic bearings. With horizontally adjustable camera arm to change the distance to the column, moves approx. 7 cm (2.7 in.) back and forth. 1/4� mounting thread.

79.5 cm / 31.3 in.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 400 x 25 x 500 mm (15.7 x 1 x 19.7 in.)

Column height: approx. 76 cm (30 in.)

Maximum load: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)

12.5-19.5 cm 4.9-7.7 in.

44.5 cm 17.5 in.

5450 RB 2 Lighting Unit With four tiltable and adjustable reflectors on mounting arms which are in turn tiltable and adjustable in height. Lights can be switched on separately.

Suitable lamps: 4 x 150 w max.

Clamp attachment for thickness up to 48 mm (1.8 in.).

Cords: 2 x 1.7 m (5 1/2 ft.)

Supplied without lamps.

3124/4356 Opal Lamp For RB 2 Lighting Unit.

4356: 75 W, 3000 K, E 27, 1100 Im. Average service live: 100 hrs.

1 piece.

3124: 150 W, 3000 K, E 27, 2500 Im. Average service life: 100 hrs.

1 piece.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

85

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:13 Uhr

Seite 86

5453-54 RB 218 / RB 218 HF Lighting Unit Cold light lighting unit with two small light banks with one daylight fluorescent each.

Lights are tiltable and adjustable in height.

Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lock joint. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases. Clamping width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)

Separate control box.

Lamps: 2 x 18 watt Color temperature: 5400 K CRI = 90-100 (1A) 5453: Mains frequency operation 5454: High frequency operation (approx. 40 kHz)

5458 Replacement Lamp for RB 218 18 W, 5400 K, Light color 12, CRI = 90-100 (1A), average service life 8000 hrs., socket 2 G 11, length 217 mm (8.5 in.). 1 piece.

5462 RB 260 digital Lighting Unit Cold light lighting unit with two small light banks with one daylight fluorescent each.

Lights are tiltable and adjustable in height.

Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lock joint. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases. Clamping width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)

Lamps can be switched on individually.

Lamps: 2 x 11 W, color temperatur 6000 K, color rendering group 1B. Suitable for use with digital cameras and camcorders.

Not available in 120 V.

5460 Replacement Lamp for RB 260 digital 11 W, 6000 K, light color 11, color rendering group 1B, average service life 8000 hrs.

Socket G 23, length 214 mm (8.4 in.).

1 piece.

86

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 87

5303 R 2 CP Image Capturing Set Portable camera stand with RB 260 digital Lighting Unit (5462).

Non-reflective matt grey baseboard with printed fine grid and cm/inch scale. Mattblack anodised aluminum section tube column with cm/inch scale. Hand-cranked height adjustment by friction drive in plastic bearings. With horizontally adjustable camera arm to change the distance to the column, moves approx. 7 cm (2.7 in.) back and forth. 1/4� mounting thread. Column folds down on baseboard.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 400 x 25 x 500 mm (15.7 x 1 x 19.7 in.)

Column height: approx. 76 cm (30 in.)

Maximum load: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs) RB 260 digital Lighting Unit with two small light banks, tiltable and adjustable in height.

Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lock joint. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases. Lamps: 2 x 11 W, 6000 K, color rendering group 1B. Suitable for use with digital cameras and camcorders.

Comes in strong carrying case 62 x 58 x 21 cm (24.4 x 22.8 x 8.3 in.) with handle and shoulder strap.

Not available in 120 V.

5301 RS 2 CP Camera Stand

64 cm / 25.2 in.

same as 5303, but without lighting unit.

5460

12.5-19.5 cm 4.9-7.7 in.

37 cm 14.5 in.

5301

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

87

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 88

The Story of „Repro the Kid“

Is it really possible to make something that is innately rugged, sturdy and as vibration-resistant as possible still smaller, lighter and more „desktop-suitable“? Individuals with very small budgets and very small cameras have asked for that. And out of that request came the „reprokid“ - a small, lightweight, compact stand for small, lightweight, compact cameras.

This unit is „good enough“ for wherever the requirement is for minimum space and light weight. And really: even the price has moved accordingly.

88

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 89

5360 „reprokid“ Camera Stand Super-compact camera stand for small, lightweight cameras (APS, digital compacts, CCD cameras, etc.). Non-reflective, mattblack baseboard. Column with cm/inch scale. Height-adjustable camera arm.

1/4” mounting thread.

Baseboard (WxHxD): 32 x 1.9 x 38 cm (12.6 x 0.7 x 15 in.)

Column height: 59 cm (23.2 in.)

Max. load: 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

Includes lighting unit with two E 27 screw-in mounts for lamps up to 250 Watt (supplied without lamps).

Power cable: 2 x 2.5 m (8 ft. 2 in.)

Suitable lamps: 3128: Reflector lamp 150 W, 3200 K 3127: Reflector lamp 250 W, 3400 K

5361 „reprokid“ Camera Stand

63.5 cm / 25 in.

Same as 5360, but without lighting unit.

13 cm 5.1 in.

32 cm 12.6 in.

38 cm 15 in.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

5361

89

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 90

Hold the Post!

Especially when copying opened books or albums you have to fight the stubborness of the inanimate.

Normally an open book will not lie flat and each page bends differently. In these cases a book cradle is very helpful, but often expensive.

Camera stands and lighting units can solve almost all problems when capturing, digitizing or copying originals. But if the original itself is „reluctant“, if the photo album refuses to stay open or if the old wavy photograph needs to be flattened or the press clipping should not shift, then the little (or bigger) helpers presented here, are of great importance.

The 5901 Copy Plate is a reliable tool for locating originals in a certian position. The 5903 Document Holder does a similar job for smaller originals and allows the possibility to position the original at any desired angle towards the camera.

90

The Kaiser Book Holder is a simple but efficient solution to this problem: A solid baseplate is covered with a non-slip coating. Preformed foam elements of varying thickness are arranged in such a manner that the opened book is compensated, yet a gap is left down the middle for the book spine. A folding glass plate with hinges located in vertical slots exerts the necessary pressure to keep the page that is to be copied in a flat position. Moreover, part of the pressure is absorbed by the foam elements under the book so that even fragile books are treated with the utmost care.

The RLR Camera Arm (see page 91) should be used for page-by-page copying because the camera can always be positioned precisely over the corresponding page without having to move the book for each shot.

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 91

5904 Book Holder 43 x 41 cm (16.9 x 16.1 in.) sized, solid baseplate with non-slip coating on top nonslip feet underneath. 6 mm (0.2 in.) thick glass plate, foldable and variable in height up to maximum 95 mm (3.7 in.).

Incl. 8 preformed foam elements for height compensation: 2x 20 mm (0.8 in.), 2x 10 mm (0.4 in.) and 4x 5 mm (0.2 in.), and two black cardboard sheets (each one A4/letter size) so that the print on the back side cannot shine through the paper.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 465 x 130 x 450 mm (18.3 x 5.1 x 17.7 in.)

5539 RLR Camera Arm For Copylizer and R1 system camera stands. For page-by-page copying from opened books or albums without moving the original. Camera platform can be shifted to left or right and locked in any position.

Adjustable end-stops. Camera can be mounted in landscape or portrait position.

Moving distance of camera platform: 15 cm (5.9 in.) from center to right or left.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

91

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 92

5901 Copy Plate Metal base plate with non-slip bottom surface.

Top surface ist matt grey lacquer with 18 % reflection for determining exposure times.

Printed grid lines with scales and DIN format markings. 4 copy subject holders made of permanently magnetised section plastic.

4 sinkable grid pins at standard hole intervals. Wall mounting is possible.

Size of printed grid area: 460 x 340 mm (18.1 x 13.4 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): 500 x 10 x 380mm (19.7 x .4 x 15 in.)

5903 Document Stage Suitable for documents and originals up to 210 x 148 mm (8.2 x 5.8 in.).

Two adjustable stop rails for accurate positioning of the document. Fixing clamps can be used in various positions.

Platform on ball head can be swivelled and tilted in all directions and pivots to 90째.

Height adjustment (up to 40 mm/1.5 in.) with blocking screw. Spirit levels in platform and base. Four individually adjustable feet.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 265 x 173 (213) x 210 mm (10.4 x 6.8 (8.4) x 8.3 in.)

92

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

5907-08 Reflection Shield

Seite 93

Avoids reflection of the camera body on reflective originals. Attaches with holding ring in camera filter mount.

5907: For lenses with 62, 58 and 55 mm filter thread 5908: For lenses with 55, 52 and 49 mm filter thread

6385 Spirit Level

One level each for vertical and horizontal shooting position. With mounting shoe and 1/4� tripod bush.

Dimensions: approx. 20 x 25 x 35 mm (.8 x 1 x 1.4 in.)

6386 Spirit Level

Circular bubble in metal mounting, self-adhesive. For permanent attachment to cameras, tripods etc. Can also be screwed on.

Diameter: approx. 25 mm (1 in.)

6388 Adhesive Paste

Permanently elastic putty for holding, supporting and arranging photo objects. The putty can be formed at will and sticks to the object. It can be removed without leaving any residue.

Package with 250 g (8.8 oz.)

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

93

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 94

Got it Straight?

If the film or chip plane and the original plane are not in an exactly parallel position, then we will get perspective distortions.

No, we do not talk about the photographer, but we are touching on an important issue when capturing images from a vertical position.

5990 Adjusting Device

In any case you can check it using spirit levels, but the Enk adjusting device will really get it straight. Primarily designed to align the camera when doing shots of monitors, it finds another useful application here. An LED is positioned exactly in the center in front of an SLR camera lens and a mirror on the original plane. One look through the viewfinder shows it all: If the LED and its mirror image are not exactly matching, you have to adjust the camera or the object till you get them straight.

For the exact alignment of the camera for screen shots and repro photography.

Adjusting device with centred light diode, cable with cable switch and detachable threaded ring with 58 mm screw-in thread.

Adaptable to other filter threads with adapter rings. With compartment for 2 x 1.5 volt AA batteries and velcro strip for fastening the compartment to the tripod or camera stand.

Without batteries.

94

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 95

3-D: Definition, Duplication, Digitization Even in the digital era a transparency on chemical reversal film undisputedly has a good reputation. Its definition, its resolution, its color rendition, in short its quality is unquestioned.

Further the transparency is and remains a unique copy. If you need more than one piece, it has to be duplicated. If you need it in your computer, it needs digitization.

Duplication means, that the original transparency, transilluminated by colorcalibrated and even light, has to be photographed once again on a suitable film, preferably a duplicating film. Slide duplicates can be produced conveniently using a camera stand and the color head of a Kaiser color enlarger.

The color head, placed upside down in „reversed“ position, serves as the light source for the original. The shooting equipment - SLR camera, extension and a suitable lens - is attached to the camera arm.

For the digitization of slides film scanners are a convenient and affordable solution, if we talk about 35 mm film. Film scanners for medium format or larger slides exceed the budget of the average user. Using a high-quality digital camera (with 3 megapixels or more) with a suitable lens (top-quality telephoto or macro lens with little distortion and shading and at suitable minimum shooting distance) in combination with the Kaiser slide copying system is an interesting alternative, especially when it is possible to calibrate the camera with respect to the predefined color temperature of the light source. And moreover: you will always be faster this way than with a film or slide scanner.

The advantages of using the color head as a light source are firstly the constant color temperature of the halogen cold light mirror lamp used, which is standardized at 3200 Kelvin for the colour sensitizing of artificial light duplicating films, and secondly the trouble-free stepless correction filtration by means of the dichroic filters.

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

95 95

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

Seite 96

5972 Slide Copying System For slides up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.).

Consisting of a color head with dichroic interference filters, white-light lever, density diaphragm, 12 V dichroic mirror halogen lamp, 100 W, 3200 K, diffuser for uniform illumination, cooling blower for continuous operation, compound negative carrier with four continuously variable masking strips, negative mask for 35 mm mounted slides, holder and hood for reversed color head, and one set of test slides.

Required: 4451 transformer (with electronic voltage stabiliser) or 4453 (without voltage stabiliser).

4459

5975 Slide Copying System Comprises color head with dichroic interference filters, white-light lever, density diaphragm, 12 V dichroic mirror halogen lamp, 100 W, 3200 K, diffuser for uniform illumination,as well as transformer, compound negative carrier with four continuously variable masking strips, negative mask for 35 mm mounted slides, holder and hood for reversed color head, and one set of test slides.

5969 Test Slides For determining picture frame for copying 1:1. For determining correct exposure times for cropping and as an aid to establishing exposure, filtration and focus.

The set consists of 3 framed 35 mm slides.

4459

96

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:14 Uhr

5979 Slide Copying Kit

5973 Cooling Blower Module

4544 Color Head

4459

4451/53 Transformer

Seite 97

Consists of holder and cover for the upturned color head. Allows the use of any Kaiser colour head as light source for slide copying.

For the 5975 Slide Copying System (produced as from 5/97). The blower can be attached to any Kaiser lighting head using a 100 W halogen lamp. Separate power supply via the included mains adapter.

Dichroic interference filters, calibrated in densitometric units up to 180, dials indirectly illuminated. White-light lever with control light.

Continuously adjustable, illuminated density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor screen.

UV filter and IR filter. Drawer for additional filters 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.). Operation only with transformer 4451 or 4453.

Supplied with halogen cold-light mirror lamp 12 V, 100 W. 4451: Transformer with starting-current limitation and electronic voltage stabilization.

4453: Without voltage stabilization.

5974 Conversion Filter

To be exchanged with the filter drawer of the color head. Required if slide copying is done with daylight film.

Dimensions: approx. 8.5 x 8.5 cm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

97

03_Stands+Light

25.06.2004 13:15 Uhr

Seite 98

5976 4 x 5“ Slide Copying Adapter

4584 Compound Negative Carrier for 7 x 7 cm Slides

4583 Compound Negative Carrier

4489 Negative Mask for 5 x 5 cm Slides

4129 Film Loader

4124/27 Film Cartridges

To duplicate slides up to 4 x 5“ in conjunction with the 5972/5975 Kaiser Slide Copying Systems or with the 4544 Color Mixing Head. The adapter is mounted on the turned over color mixing head. Supplied with adapter plate so that a Kaiser negative carrier can be positioned on the slide copying adapter.

For mounted 6 x 6 slides with outer dimensions 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.). Four steplessly adjustable masking strips for selecting the desired detail.

For use with all negative masks and glass inserts sized 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.).

Adjustable guide pins for various film widths.

Four steplessly adjustable masking strips.

Two register pins.

For mounted slides with outer dimensions 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.). For insertion into 4583 Compound Negative Carrier.

Dimensions: 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.)

For loading bulk 35-mm film into cartridges in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m (98 ft.). With frame counter and remainingfilm meter.

Dimensions: approx. 130 x 110 x 80 mm (5.1 x 4.3 x 3.1 in.)

For 35 mm film.

For self-loading with bulk film material.

Clamp fastener in reel axle.

4124: Metal type, 5 pcs.

4127: Plastic type, 5 pcs.

98

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

Seite 99

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

Seite 100

Scanning in Three Dimensions When you speak about „scanning“ you would normally associate this with capturing a two-dimensional original. The flatbed scanner in the mind’s eye is found today on almost any office desk and in many home offices.

But three-dimensional scanning is nothing extraordinary, it’s plain and simple digital photography using a moving CCD line instead of an array.

The only restriction: The subjects must not move and continuous light is a must.

The advantage: a scanner camera provides extremely high resolution at a comparatively low price.

The Scando icoss is such a camera. It is both a repro scanner and a camera for threedimensional objects. It combines the high-quality results of a flatbed scanner with the versatility of a camera.

The Scando scanning camera is a capable tool for those, • who need high resolution image data for high-quality printed products • who need finest detail rendition for analysis and measuring • who need large enlargements without pixelation for verifying and identification • who need to scan valuable or fragile originals without contact

100

• who file high-resolution image data for subsequent use.

Both the „35 mm scanners“ icoss/3 and icoss/7 (29 x 37 mm scanning area) accept Nikon lenses, the icoss/5 (43 x 43 mm scanning area) and the icoss/9 (29 x 43 mm scanning area) take enlarging lenses with M 39 (Leica thread). A focussing device is supplied with the camera.

Aspect ratio and framing is determined by the choice of lens and the distance from the object. Detail and sharp focus can be controlled conveniently the same way as with an SLR using the reflex viewfinder with split image and micro prism spot.

The complete scanning procedure needs only one pass of the triple CCD line. The color depth of 12 bits per color provides for more shadow details and higher dynamic range.

Data transmission to your computer is via a FireWire (IEEE 1394) interface, providing transmission speeds up to 400 Mbit per second.

The Scando icoss cameras come with the popular SilverFast scanner software running on Windows and MacIntosh computers. IT8 targets for color calibration in reflected and transmitted light are also supplied with the camera.

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

Seite 101

Flat large-format originals which do not fit on a flatbed scanner, can be captured in total or in detail using reflective light. In this application the Scando serves as a repro scanner for prints, art works, paintings, maps etc. as well as for reproductions from books.

Transparent originals like large-format transparencies, glass negatives, x-ray films and CTs can be scanned with the Scando mounted on a camera stand and using transmitted light.

Application possibilities for using the Scando as a „scanner“ for capturing three-dimensional still objects are as diverse as the objects themselves. This includes catalog photography, pack shots, photography for medical, scientific, documentary or measuring purposes, for law enforcement or industrial quality assurance.

Additional fields of application for the Scando icoss/3 and Scando icoss/7 include mounting to a microscope or as a digital back on a view camera.

Scanning Cameras

101 101

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

Seite 102

5120-23 „Scando icoss“ Scanning Camera

5120 Scando icoss/3

102

The Scando icoss is a repro scanner and a camera for three-dimensional subjects.

It provides high resolution image files - for prepress, and for quantitative and qualitative detail analysis for permanent documentation and archiving.

Supplied without lens.

5121 Scando icoss/5

5122 Scando icoss/7

5123 Scando icoss/9

Type

Digital scanning camera/SLR type

Viewfinder

Reflex viewfinder with split image and microprism spot for focussing

Lens mount

Nikon Bayonet

Helical focussing mount M 39x1

Nikon Bayonet

Helical focussing mount M 39 x 1

CCD sensor: Triple line

3 x 3648 pixels

3 x 5363 pixels

3 x 8192 pixels

3 x 8192 pixels

Scanning area

29 x 37 mm

43 x 43 mm

29 x 37 mm

29 x 43 mm

Pixels

3648 x 4625

5363 x 5363

8192 x 10550

8192 x 12300

Camera resolution

16,8 mill. pixels

28,8 mill. pixels

86,4 mill. pixels

100 mill. pixels

Maximum file size 8 bit processing 16 bit processing

48 MB 96 MB

82 MB 164 MB

247 MB 494 MB

288 MB 576 MB

Color depth

3 x 12 Bit

3 x 12 Bit

3 x 12 Bit

3 x 12 Bit

Dynamics (D max)

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

Output resolution on letter format (optical)

max. 400 dpi

max. 600 dpi

max. 900 dpi

max. 900 dpi

Contrast range

11 f-stops

Interface

IEEE 1394 (FireWire/iLink)

Software supplied

SilverFast with Photoshop Plug-In and Twain driver

Accessories included

FireWire cable, carrying case, IT8 targets (reflective, transmitted)

Operating system

Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows XP, Mac OS 9.0

System requirements

Pentium 300 MHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 128 MB or more, HD: 10 GB or more

Pentium 400 MHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 128 MB or more, HD: 10 GB or more

Pentium 1 GHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 512MB or more, HD: 20GB or more

Pentium 1 GHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 512MB or more, HD: 20GB or more

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

5106 Nikon Lens AF 50 mm / 1.8 D

Seite 103

Standard lens for Scando icoss/3 and icoss/7 Camera Scanners.

Focal length: Max. aperture: Coverage: Optical design: Min. distance: Aperture scale: Diaphragm: Filter thread: Dimensions: Weight:

5107 Nikon Lens AF Micro 60 mm / 2.8 D

Macro lens for Scando icoss/3 and icoss/7 Camera Scanners.

Focal length: Max. aperture: Scale ratio: Coverage: Optical design: Min. distance: Aperture scale: Diaphragm: Filter thread: Dimensions: Weight:

4328 Rodenstock Lens Rodagon WA 4.0/60 mm

4350 Schneider Lens Apo-Componon HM 4.0/60 mm

Scanning Cameras

50 mm 1:1.8 46° 6 elements in 5 sections 45 cm (18 in.)

1.8 - 22 automatic 52 mm 63 mm ø x 39 mm (2.5 in. ø x 1.5 in.)

160 g (5.6 oz.)

60 mm 1:2.8 1:1 39° 8 elements in 7 sections 22 cm (8.7 in.)

2.8 - 32 automatic 62 mm 70 mm ø x 74.5 mm (2.8 in. ø x 2.9 in.)

440 g (15.5 oz.)

Camera lens for Scando icoss/5 and icoss/9 Camera Scanners.

Optical design: 6 elements Aperture scale: 4 - 22 Diaphragm: preset, click-stop Filter thread: 40.5 mm x 0.75 Dimensions: 41 mm x ø 50 mm (1.6 in. x ø 2 in.)

Camera lens for Scando icoss/5 and icoss/9 Camera Scanners.

Optical design: 6 elements Aperture scale: 4 - 22 Diaphragm: preset, click-stop Filter thread: 43 mm x 0.75 Dimensions: 43.2 mm x ø 46 mm (1.7 in. x ø 1.8 in.)

4350 4328

103

04_Scanning Cameras

25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr

Seite 104

5090 Tripod

Sturdy camera tripod for light to mediumheavy cameras. Tall centre column for a large working height. Fixed setting angle for legs. Handy wing screws. Combined with 5091 Head ideal for Scando icoss scanner cameras.

Without tripod head.

Setting height: approx. 56 - 170 cm (22 - 66.9 in.)

Closed length: approx. 61 cm (24 in.)

Weight: approx. 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs) Thread: 3/8“ Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs)

5091 Tripod Head

3D tilt-and-pan head for 5090 tripod, with quick-change system.

Simple to use, for Scando icoss scanner cameras and 35 mm and medium format cameras.

Can be adjusted in three levels mit separate blocking handles. Integrated quick-release connector with safety lock.

Pan: Tilt: Sideway tilt: Height: Weight: Tripod thread: Camera mounting thread: Load:

104

360° -30° +90° -90° +30° approx. 13 cm (5.1 in.) approx. 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

3/8“ 3/8“ max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs)

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 105

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 106

Luminous Surfaces

Light is the elixir of life in photography. This not only applies to the light you need when shooting a picture, but in addition to the lighting conditions when viewing the results.

Light is needed to illuminate and to transilluminate depending on whether the subject is reflective or transparent.

A light box is the appropriate tool to transilluminate a transparent original. It seems at a first glance that this must be the simplest of all light sources: Take a square box, put some lamps in it, cover it with diffusion - done. Without doubt, this is a light source, but most likely completely inappropriate for a photographic application.

106

Because there are stringent requirements for „transmitted light sources“. The most important one is evenness: every spot on the luminous surface should have the same brightness, or - to put it in correct technical terms - luminance of the viewing area should be constant, the inevitable edge drop may not exceed a certain critical value. This is equally important for viewing and inspecting slides as for photographic reproduction or duplication of transparent originals.

Selected materials for the lit surface, a well-balanced design of interior reflectors and light conduction techniques are used to meet these requirements.

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 107

If you have to inspect color qualities of a transparency or if you want to capture a color original, then it is important that the light box has the correct color properties. Fluorescent lamps with daylight-type spectrum, a well-defined color temperature and a high color rendition index are required. Reflectors and diffusion material have to stay „neutral“, they must not effect the color rendition.

If the transilluminated original is not viewed by the human eye but with a camera, we have to add further requirements. For example there must be a minimum luminance in order to reach practical f-numbers or the luminance must be particularly high to capture specific details.

Even fluorescents generate a certain amount of heat, and if you have to use many lamps in a light box to achieve a high illuminance, it might be necessary to take precautions to reduce the thermal load of the originals - an effective cooling system has to be integrated.

But there are still other needs and requirements, for example battery operation on small and portable light boxes. If these - in addition - are extremely flat, they can easily be stowed away in a bag or a briefcase.

The Kaiser light boxes described on the following pages have different features according to the potential requirements. Now you only have to choose the appropriate size and then you have your luminous surface.

If the viewing „eye“ belongs to a digital camera, then there could be additional requirements to the stability of the light. Very often flicker-free lighting is important, and that is achieved by high-frequency operating systems for the fluorescent lamps. For extremely critical applications a residual ripple suppression might be indispensible.

Light Boxes

107 107

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 108

2420-22 „slimlite“ Light Box A compact and handy, super-flat daylight light box. Uniform illumination as a result of special light conducting and reflecting technology in conjunction with cold-cathode fluorescent tubes. Service life: approx.

10,000 hours. Color temperature approx.

5000 Kelvin (± 5%). ON/OFF switch.

Protective cover included.

2420: Viewing area: approx. 10 x 12.5 cm (4 x 5 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

16 x 1.4 x 15 cm (6.3 x 0.6 x 5.9 in.)

Weight: approx. 260 g (9.2 oz) Battery powered: 6 x 1.5 V AAA-type Mains operation: with mains adapter 2419 Supplied without batteries or mains adapter.

2421: Viewing area: approx. 18 x 13 cm (7 x 5 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

22 x 2.1 x 19 cm (8.7 x 0.8 x 7.5 in.)

Weight: approx. 770 g (1 lbs. 11 oz) Battery powered: 6 x 1.5 V AA-type Mains operation: with mains adapter 2419 Supplied without batteries or mains adapter.

2422: Viewing area: approx. 30 x 20 cm (12 x 8 in.)

Light box with fold-out feet and clamping strip.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

37 x 2.5 x 28 cm (14.6 x 1 x 11 in.)

Weight: approx. 1.950 g (4 lbs. 5 oz.)

Mains operation with separate mains adapter (included).

2419 Mains Adapter To operate the 2420 and 2421 "slimlite" light boxes on the mains.

108

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 109

2417-18 „slimlite“ Light Box Extremely flat daylight light boxes. Even illumination achieved by using a special method of light conduction and reflection. Color temperature approx. 5000 Kelvin. On/Off switch.

With clamping bar and fold-out bracket. Can be wall-mounted.

2417: Illuminated area: approx. 46 x 20,5 cm (18.1 x 8.1 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 55 x 3 x 30,5 cm (21.7 x 1.2 x 12 in.)

Lamps: 2 x 13 W Mains adapter: 24 V, 1 A 2418: Illuminated area: approx. 46 x 30,5 cm (18.1 x 12 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 55 x 3 x 40,5 cm (21.7 x 1.2 x 15.9 in.)

Lamps: 2 x 13 W Mains adapter: 24 V, 2 A

2135

Light Boxes

109

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 110

2403-06/2423-26/2433-36 „prolite basic 2“ Light Box 5000 Kelvin color temperature. Uses special fluorescent tubes for high color fidelity. Color rendition index CRI = 90-100.

High-quality acrylic-glass plate of exceptionally uniform transmission over the entire visible spectral range. Robust, allmetal housing with non-slip rubber feet and the possibility to mount the light box on a wall. ON/OFF switch.

Sorting attachment for 30 or 70 mounted 35mm slides (only for light boxes with a viewing area of 30 x 21 cm (11.8 x 8.3 in.) and 50 x 30 cm (19.7 x 11.8 in.)).

2 m (6 ft. 7 in.) power supply cable.

2403-06: Basic versions. Mains frequency operation.

2423-26: as 2403-2406, but with additional integrated high-frequency operating system (operating frequency approx. 40 kHz) for flicker-free start-up and operation.

2433-36: as 2423-2426, but with additional brightness control for continuously variable dimming down to 10% of maximum light output.

2406 is not available in 120 V.

2146, 2474 2136, 2476, 2477

110

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 111

Survey: prolite basic 2

Code

Illuminated area

Lamps

Dimensions (cm/inch)

2403

30 x 21 cm 11.8 x 8.3 in 30 x 21 cm 11.8 x 8.3 in 30 x 21 cm 11.8 x 8.3 in

2x8W

33.5 13.2 33.5 13.2 33.5 13.2

x x x x x x

50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 19.7 x 11.8 in 50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 19.7 x 11.8 in 50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 19.7 x 11.8 in

56 22 56 22 56 22

x x x x x x

6 x 36.5 2.4 x 14.4 6 x 36.5 2.4 x 14.4 6 x 36.5 2.4 x 14.4

50 x 60 cm 19.7 x 23.6 50 x 60 cm 19.7 x 23.6 50 x 60 cm 19.7 x 23.6

56 22 56 22 56 22

x x x x x x

6 x 66.5 2.4 x 26.3 6 x 66.5 2.4 x 26.3 6 x 66.5 2.4 x 26.3

2423 2433

2405 2425 2435

2406 2426 2436

Light Boxes

2x8W 2x8W

4 x 13 W 4 x 13 W 4 x 13 W

Special features

6 x 27.5 2.4 x 10.8 6 x 27.5 HF 2.4 x 10.8 6 x 27.5 HF, dimmable 2.4 x 10.8

Replacement lamps (Set of 2 or 4 lamps) 2474 2474 2474

2476 HF

2476

HF, dimmable

2476

2477 HF

2477

HF, dimmable

2477

111

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr

Seite 112

2492-93 „prolite scan SC“ Light Box Professional light box for transparent originals of all types, e.g. slides, negatives, X-rays and microfiches. Color temperature 5000 Kelvin. Four Dulux fluorescent lamps with high color reproduction quality CRI = 90-100. Very high lighting power: approx.

50.000 lux. High-frequency operation system (frequency approx. 40 kHz) for flicker-free start-up and running. So especially suitable as backlight source for use with camera scanners. There are also no stroboscopic effects, hum and induction infererence. Very quite vibration-free fan cooling permits unlimited continuous operation with minimum heating of the viewing surface.

Operating hours counter. Cm and inch scales on the working surface. Non-slip rubber feet. Can be wall-mounted. On/off switch.

Cord 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)

Illuminated area: approx. 48 x 44 cm (18.9 x 17.3 in.)

Lamps: 4 x 55 W, 5400 K Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 63 x 9 x 53,5 cm (24.8 x 3.5 x 21.1 in.)

2493 with additional brightness control for continuously variable dimming down to 10% of maximum light output.

2414, 2487

2395 DC Voltage Mains Adapter For residual ripple suppression (<1%) on devices fitted with high-frequency lighting systems and in conjunction with highly sensitive camera systems.

Max. load: 400 W Not available in 120 V. 2395

112

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:20 Uhr

Seite 113

2170 „handylite“ Light Case Compact monocoque case with daylight light box and integrated mains transformer.

Color temperature 5000 Kelvin. Fluorescent lamps with high color rendition quality.

CRI = 90-100.

Illuminated area: approx. 25 x 20 cm (9.8 x 7.9 in.).

Lamps: 2 x 8 W, 5400 K. Dimensions: approx. 400 x 335 x 95 mm (15.7 x 13.2 x 3.7 in.)

2146, 2474

2139/2120 „hobbylite“ Light Box 2139: "hobbylite 1" Light Box Daylight light box for battery and mains operation. With fold-out support, clamping strip and facilities for wall mounting. ON/OFF switch. Supplied with 8 x magnifier and 9 V mains adapter. Without batteries.

Viewing area: approx.25 x 15 cm (9.8 x 5.9“) Illumination: 1 x 8 Watt, 5400 Kelvin Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 31 x 6 x 22 cm (12.2 x 2.4 x 8.7 in.)

2120: "hobbylite 2" Light Box Daylight light box for mains operation. Spring clamping strip, fold-down support for horizontal and vertical format, facilities for horizontal and vertical wall mounting, scale in cm/inch, and ON/OFF switch.

Supplied with 12 V mains adapter.

Viewing area: approx.32 x 26 cm (12.6 x 10.2“) Illumination: 2x 8 Watt, 5400 Kelvin Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 40 x 8 x 34 cm (15.7 x 3.1 x 13.4 in.)

Light Boxes

2120

2139

2133

113

05_Light Boxes

25.06.2004 13:20 Uhr

Seite 114

Fluorescent Lamps Replacement lamps for light boxes and light cases. Color temperature 5400 Kelvin, light color 12. Color rendition index CRI = 90-100. average service life: 8000 hours (with constant color temperature). If very accurate color reproduction is needed, fluorescent lamps should be replaced in sets.

Code Tube form

Dulux

8W

114

13 W

55 W

Wattage

Socket

Lenght (w/o pins)

Tube ø

Quantity for light box (pieces)

2133

8W

G5

288 mm

16 mm

1

2120, 2139

2146 2474

8W 8W

G5 G5

288 mm 288 mm

16 mm 16 mm

1 2

2170, 2403/23/33 2170, 2403/23/33

2135

13 W

G5

517 mm

16 mm

2

2417/18

2136

13 W

G5

517 mm

16 mm

1

2476 2477

13 W 13 W

G5 G5

517 mm 517 mm

16 mm 16 mm

2 4

2405-06, 2425-26, 2435-36 2405, 2425, 2435 2406, 2426, 2436

2414

55 W

2 G 11

533 mm

1

2492-93

2487

55 W

2 G 11

533 mm

2x 17,5 mm 2x 17,5 mm

4

2492-93

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 115

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 116

Tools for Manual Workers Talk about „image processing“ today and you can be pretty sure that this means using the computer to do it.

You may also find quite a number of digital photographers viewing their digitized slides on a digital, virtual light box, sorting, marking and archiving them on their computer desktop.

Besides the necessary knowledge and the appropriate computer equipment, a strong hand for the mouse and an agile finger for the mouse click is all the „physical effort“ that is required.

But there are also the committed manual workers, who – away from resolution problems and color management discussions – cut and frame their processed slide film, view it with „real“ magnifiers, sort and file it and prepare it for projection. This type of „image processing“ needs the proper tools also, and that’s what we are talking about here.

116

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 117

1

The multitude of different slide mounts on the market could indicate that there is not a suitable mount for everybody.

Everybody has his preferences, his good or bad experiences and in the end sticks to the type of mount he likes

best. This means, that he himself cuts and mounts his slide films. With 36 pictures on one film and possibly five rolls of film for a summer holiday, this could become a pretty tedious post-holiday occupation.

A semi-automatic slide-mounting machine like the Kaiser „diamount“ for the C.A.M. system can be a tremendous convenience. C.A.M. stands for „cut and mount“ and indicates that both are done with one unit. The 35 mm film strip is simply fed into the unit, can be viewed through a foldable magnifier above an illuminated area, is moved into the opened slide mount and finally is cut straight, neatly and precisely with one single movement of the hand. The mount is removed from the unit and snaps shut automatically – done. The glassless C.A.M. slide mounts that are used with the unit, have one significant

difference compared to other mounts: They open from the side, not from the top. They provide for secure positioning, have a secure snap lock (which can also be opened again), feature rounded-off bevelled corners for trouble-free use in the projector and can be stored spill-safe in spacesaving CS slide magazines.

2

Those who prefer another type of slide mount use a good slide cutter like the „diacut 1“. The precisely guided rotary blade guarantees a cut exactly there where you want it.

3

Next comes a thorough first viewing of the slides, still without too much effort, i.e. setting up projector and screen. For first brillant impressions a simple AC or battery-operated slide viewer with bright illumination and optically clean lenses can do the job. And nothing is

Slied Accessories

as easy as grabbing a compact folding viewer like the „diascop modulo“ and a bunch of slides and see some friends to view the results of last weekend’s garden party.

117 117

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 118

4

Sorting slides is advisable for several reasons. Especially when you prepare the slides for projection it is best to organize them in an effective and logical order and then put them into the magazine. Simple sorting desks or light boxes will do the job.

This is also a convenient moment to label or mark the slides. This is very practical when you try to find a particular slide out of hundreds or thousands.

There are special marking pens, the writing will remain permanently on all smooth surfaces like slide frames or CD Roms or even on RC paper.

6

In the end archiving is all that is left to be done. You may use either slide trays with the slides ready for projection and which in turn can be stored in stackable boxes or cases, or you can file them in special transparent slide storage pages, which can easily be placed on a light box.

118

5

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 119

2167-68 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;diamount C.A.M./CSâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Slide Cutter and Mounter Convenient cutting and automatic mounting of 35mm transparencies in C.A.M. and C.A.M./CS mounts. Easy and precise cutting with self-sharpening rotary blade in closed plastic housing. The film is automatically held down while cutting. Sprung friction-wheel transport for uniform advance of the film strip right up to the last frame. Illuminated viewing area with format marks and fixing marks to insert the mounted slides. 2.5x fold-up magnifier, completely detachable.

Connection for mains adapter 2009 (optional accessory). Supplied with spare bulb (2107).

Battery operated: 2 x 1.5 V C-type (not included) Bulb: 2.5 V, 0.3 A, E 10, frosted Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.17 x 8.3 x 11 cm (6.7 x 3.3 x 4.3 in.)

2167: Without slide mounts 2168: Combi-Start Kit: includes 200 slide mounts C.A.M.-SYSTEM CS 2107

2009 Mains Transformer For mains operation of 2167-68 Slide Cutting and Mounting Unit and of 2005 Slide viewer.

Output: 2.5 V/250 mA sec.

Cord: 2 m (6.6 ft.), with plug according to DIN 45323 Dimensions (WxHxD): 46 x 52 x 57 mm (1.8 x 2 2.2 in.)

2156-57 C.A.M./CS Slide Mounts One-piece glassless snap-down slide mount, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), as defined in DIN 108, for automatic mounting with C.A.M./CS slide cutters and mounters.

Manual mounting is also possible. Clamping strip to secure and accurately position the transparency. Guide rail for exact position of the transparency during automatic mounting.

Mount thickness 1.8 mm (0.07 in.). For CS, LKM and Paximat Compact magazines.

2156: Pack of 100 2157: Pack of 200 + 20

Slied Accessories

119

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 120

2115 „diacut 1“ Slide Cutter

Slide cutter for film cassettes, cartridges size 126 and 35 mm film. Very easy and accurate cut by self-sharpening rotating round blade in closed plastic housing. Film transport roller for exact size positioning at frame line.

Size markings for 18 x 24, 24 x 24, 28 x 28, and 24 x 36 mm. Fingertip recesses for easy removel of cut slide. Illuminated viewing zone. Detachable lift-up 2.5 x magnifying glass. Alignment markings for use with mounted slides.

Lamp: 10 W, E 14, pear-shaped Cord: 1.8 m (6 ft.)

Dimensions: approx. 125 x 95 x 100 mm (4.9 x 3.3 x 3.9 in.)

2109

2152 „dia SR“ Slide Mount

One-piece glassless plastic mount, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), with snap-down mask. The slide is in place as soon as it is laid on base of the mount. Guide pins for quick and easy fitting.

4-point snap lock provides absolute flatness and prevents the mount from coming open by itself. Can be used in almost all slide trays. Excellently suited to LKM magazines.

Frame thickness: 1.8 mm (.07 in.)

Supplied in boxes of 100.

2158 CS Slide Mount

One-piece glassless snap-down slide mount, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), as defined in DIN 108.

Clamping strip to secure and accurately position the transparency. Rounded corners for smooth guidance through the projector.

Mount thickness 1.8 mm (0.07 in.). For CS, LKM and Paximat Compact magazines.

Spacesaving, non-spill slide storage in CS magazines.

Pack of 300.

120

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 121

2021 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;diascop moduloâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Slide Viewer Modular designed multi-purpose slide viewer.

Slide viewer for mounted slides with mounts up to 3 mm (0.1 in.) thick, and for film strips in protective sleeves. Cold light source with high light output on 39 x 39 (1.5 x 1.5 in.) viewing area. Magnifier folds up or folds down flat to the top of the unit.

2.5 x magnifier is detachable for use as a hand-held magnifier or as a desktop magnifier in conjunction with the supplied stand.

The light source is an Osram DULUX MINI torch, that can be removed form the viewer and used separately. It is fitted with a 3 Watt power-economising bulb of 8000 hours service life, luminous intensity: approx. 10000 Lux, Colour temperature: approx. 4000 Kelvin. With fastening clip and ON/OFF switch Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 AA (Not supplied with the unit)

Slied Accessories

121

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 122

2003 „diascop 1“ Slide Viewer

Slide viewer with 2x magnifying lens for framed slides, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), and uncut film strips in protective sleeves.

On/off switch.

Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 V C-size (supplied without batteries) Lamp: 2.5 V, .3 amp., E10, spherical Lens: 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm (3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

2107

2005 „diascop 3“ Slide Viewer

2107

2009 Mains Transformer

2006 „diascop 4“ Slide Viewer

Slide viewer with 3 x magnifying double lens for framed slides, 5 x 5 (2 x 2 in.), and uncut film strips in protective sleeves. Drop chute with collecting tray. On/off switch and connecting socket for mains transformer 2009.

Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 V C-size (supplied without batteries) Lamp: 2.5 V, .3 amp., E10, spherical Lens: 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in) Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm (3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

For mains operation of 2005 Slide Viewer and 2167-68 Slide Cutter and Mounter.

As 2005, but for connecting to mains.

Lamp: 15 W, E 14, pear-shaped Cord: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm (3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

2008

122

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr

Seite 123

2015 „diascop 50 N“ Slide Viewer Slide viewer with 3x magnifying double lens for 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) framed slides and uncut film strips, change slider for convenient slide changing without annoying bright intervals, drop chute for up to 40 slides. Top section tiltable for adjusting desired viewing angle, mains connection.

Lamp: Lenses: Cord: Dimensions (WxHxD):

15 W, E 14, pear-shaped 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.)

1,8 m (6 ft.) approx.150 x 80 x 175 mm (5.9 x 3.1 x 6.9 in.)

2008

2010-11 „diascop mini“ Slide Viewer Small compact slide viewer for framed slides 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.). With hinged prop.

Required batteries:2 x 1,5 V AA-size (supplied without batteries) Lamp: 2,5 V, 0,3 A, E 10, spherical Lens: 63 x 53 mm (2.5 x 2.1 in.)

Dimensions approx. 75 x 60 x 105 mm (WxHxD): (3 x 2.4 x 4.1 in.)

2010: with 3-fold magnifying double lens 2011: with 2-fold magnifying lens

2012 Slide Viewer For framed slides, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), and film strips in protective sleeves. Lens diameter 18 mm (.7 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

55 x 55 x 60 mm (2.2 x 2.2 x 2.4 in.)

Slied Accessories

2012

2107

8933 8 x 2012

123

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:24 Uhr

Seite 124

2124 Slide Viewer and Sorter For 30 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) slides. Convenient table-top design. Good color reproduction thanks to special surface material.

Lamp: Cord: Dimensions (WxHxD):

candle-shaped lamp 25 W, E 14 1,8 m (6 ft.) approx. 33.5 x 10.5 x 26 cm (17.1 x 5.1 x 14 in.)

2112

2139/2120 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;hobbyliteâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Light Box 2139: "hobbylite 1" Light Box Daylight light box for battery and mains operation. With fold-down support, clamping strip and facilities for wall mounting. ON/OFF switch. Supplied with 8 x magnifier and 9 V mains adapter. Without batteries.

Viewing area: approx. 25 x 15 cm (9.8 x 5.9 in.)

Illumination: 1 x 8 Watt, 5400 Kelvin Dimensions approx. 31 x 6 x 22 cm (WxHxD): (12.2 x 2.4 x 8.7 in.)

2120

2139

2133

124

2120: "hobbylite 2" Light Box Daylight light box for mains operation. Spring clamping strip, fold-down support for horizontal and vertical format, facilities for horizontal and vertical wall mounting, scale in cm/inch, ON/OFF switch. Supplied with 12 V mains adapter.

Viewing area: approx. 32 x 26 cm (12.6 x 10.2 in.)

Illumination: 2 x 8 Watt, 5400 Kelvin Dimensions approx. 40 x 8 x 34 cm (WxHxD): (15.7 x 3.1 x 13.4 in.)

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:24 Uhr

Seite 125

2035/39 Labelling Pens

Non-smearing, for labelling slide frames, CD ROMs and plastic-coated photo paper. Also suitable for plastic, glass, metal and other smooth surfaces.

Quick-drying.

2035: black 2039: set consisting of one pen in black, red, green and blue

2040

2041 10 pens each in black, red, green, blue

2570-2790 Transparent Slide Storage Pages

40 pens in black

For orderly and safe storing and filing of mounted slides.

For detailed information see page 140.

2500 Filing Binder

Special-sized 4-ring binder for Kaiser Transparent Slide Sleeves and Negative Filing Sheets.

For detailed information see page 140.

Slied Accessories

125

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:24 Uhr

Seite 126

2203-04 CS Slide Trays

For space-saving, non-spill storage of slides in CS mounts. Suitable for CS-compatible 35mm slide projectors. Two CS slide trays, each one holding 100 slides, in stackable box with transparent lid. Trays and stackable box made of impact-resistant plastic.

Dimensions of the stackable box (WxHxD): approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)

2203: Box with two trays 2204: Two boxes, each with two trays

2207 CS Slide Trays

For space-saving, non-spill storage of slides in CS mounts. Suitable for CS-compatible 35mm slide projectors.

Two CS slide trays, each holding 100 slides, in stackable box with drawer. Trays and stackable box made of impact-resistant plastic.

Dimensions of stackable box (WxHxD): approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)

2217 Universal Slide Trays

For the storage of 35 mm slides. Suitable for most 35 mm slide mounts and for almost all 35 mm slide projectors. Universal slide trays and stacking box made of impact-proof plastic.

Stacking box with label field on hinged lid.

Set with 3 stackable boxes, each fitted with 2 universal slide trays for 50 slides each.

Dimensions of stacking box (WxHxD): 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)

2213 Universal DIN Slide Trays

To store mounted 35mm slides. Suitable for most 35mm slide mounts and almost all 35mm slide projectors. Two slide trays, each holding 50 slides, in a stackable box.

Trays and stackable box made of impact-resistant plastic. Trays as defined in German standard DIN 108.

Dimensions of stackable box (WxHxD): approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)

126

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:24 Uhr

2206 Slide Case

Seite 127

Handy case with four CS slide trays, each holding 100 35mm slides in CS or C.A.M./CS mounts. Case and CS slide trays made of impact-resistant plastic.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

300 x 62 x 350 mm (11.8 x 2.4 x 13.8 in.)

2219 Slide Case

Compact case for storing 35 mm slides.

With six universal slide trays each for fifty 35 mm slides. Suitable for most slide mounts and for almost all 35 mm slide projectors.

Inside of cover can be used as a projection screen.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

290 x 63 x 425 mm (11.4 x 2.5 x 16.7 in.)

2218 Slide Archive

For storing 35 mm slides. With ten universal slide trays each for fifty 35 mm slides.

Suitable for most slide mounts and for almost all 35 mm slide projectors.

With carrying handle.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

125 x 350 x 287 mm (4.9 x 13.8 x 11.3 in.)

Slied Accessories

127

06_Slide Accesso

25.06.2004 13:24 Uhr

Seite 128

2313 Laser Light Pointer

For slide and film presentations, overhead and data projecting, screen presentations and non-contact pointing in research, medicine and industry. Sturdy black all-metal pen-shape housing.

Length: approx. 145 mm (5.7 in.)

The bright light dot is clearly visible in daylight. Safety Class 2.

Range approx. 300 m (330 yd.).

Batteries included (2 x 1.5 V AAA-type)

2316 Laser Light Pointer

For slide and film presentations, overhead and data projecting, screen presentations and non-contact pointing in research, medicine and industry. Sturdy black all-metal pen-shape housing.

Length: approx. 140 mm (5.5 in.)

The bright light dot is clearly visible in daylight. Safety Class 2.

Range approx. 150 m (165 yd.).

Batteries included (2 x 1.5 V AAA-type)

If you are looking for a simple and lowcost way to transfer your slides to video to include them into a video film, please check, if the Video Transfer Set on page 158 is an appropriate solution.

128

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:37 Uhr

Seite 129

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 130

After Treatment

After processing your films, burning image files to a CD, enlarging or printing pictures, there is still something to do.

For example, pictures and prints have to be trimmed. Trimmers â&#x20AC;&#x201C; like those described from page 141 on â&#x20AC;&#x201C; provide for clean cutting edges and perfect angles. A cutting ruler will also do a good job.

Magnifiers are indispensible for precise inspection of pictures and films.

Requirements can be extremely different and according to that there is a broad range of magnifiers.

Marking and labelling helps to keep order and control. Special labelling pens for CDRs, RC papers, slide mounts and archiving materials should always be at hand.

You will find these useful little helpers and more on the following pages.

130

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 131

6395–96 „Pick-it“ Post Card For postcards with the personal touch. You can turn your own prints into individual greetings, congratulations or invitation cards, for sending on holiday, at Christmas or Easter, for birthdays and anniversaries, weddings, etc.

Adhesive transparent film on the front, under which photos up to 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in.) in size can be attached. The film functions like a lamination and protects the print. Narrow border for personal signature. Back marked with postcard layout.

6395: Pick-it post card, 1 card 6396: Pick-it post card, 3 cards

6398–99 Counter Display Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 18 x 31 x 7 cm (7.1 x 12.2 x 4.1 in.)

6399: with 60 postcards packed individually 6398: with 20 packs of 3 postcards each

Image + Archiving

131

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 132

6348 Red-Eye-Pen

Removes red eyes on color prints and slides. The natural eye color and reflections are preserved, the photo is not scratched.

Especially soft fine point for exact work.

Simple use. Long lasting. Acid-free and nontoxic.

Not suitabel for Polaroid photos.

Length: approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.)

6349 20 x 6348

2035/39 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;CD[R]penâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Labelling Pens

For smudge-proof writing on CDRs, slide frames and plastic coated photographic papers. Also suitable for plastic, glass, metal and other smooth surfaces. Quick-drying.

2035: black, 1 piece 2039: set consisting of one each black, red, green and blue.

2040 10 pens each of black, red, green, blue

2041 40 pens black

132

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

6362/65/67 Cotton Gloves

Seite 133

To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives, optical glass, etc. 100 % Cotton, washable at all temperatures.

6362: one pair, size 15 (for large hands) 6365: one pair, size 12 (standard size) 6367: three pairs, size 12 (standard size)

6391 Print Detail Determinator

For quick and exact determination of the desired detail. The sizes are adjustable with two independently movable masking segments, with any desired height-to-width ratio.

Maximun masking size: 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.)

6689 Scissors

Body of fibreglass-reinforced nylon. Cutting blades of specially heat-treated stainless steel, antimagnetic.

Length: approx. 18 cm (7.1 in.)

4315 Cutting Ruler

Cuts paper, foils and film. Transparent pressure ruler with attached metal guide bar for the cutting head. Three exchangeable cutting heads with rotary blade for line cutting, zigzag cutting and perforation. Pressure ruler with cm and inch scales, format markings and grid pattern, cutting mat with scales line-up squares.

Cutting length: approx. 31 cm (12.2 in.)

Cutting thickness: max. 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)

Cutting mat: approx. 38 x 10 cm (15 x 4 in.)

Image + Archiving

133

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 134

2344 Aspherical Magnifier

High-quality magnifying loupe for professional applications. Multi-coated, high-performance optical system for superb resolution of the finest details at maximum contrast over the entire viewing area, even out to the edges without the slightest distortions.

Eyesight correction from +1.0 to -2.0 dioptres. Exchangeable cover for reflected and transmitted light viewing. Eye cap rolls back.

Neck cord included.

Magnification: 6 x Lens diam.: 46 mm (1.8 in.)

Height: approx. 63 mm (2.5 in.)

2346 Aspherical 6x6 Magnifier

High-quality magnifying loupe for assessing slides up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and other originals. Multi-coated high-performance optical system for superb resolution of the finest details at maximum contrast over the entire viewing area, even out to the edges without the slightest distortions.

Eyesight correction from +0 to -1.5 dioptres.

Exchangeable cover for reflected and transmitted light viewing. Eye cap rolls back.

Neck cord included.

Magnification: 3 x Lens diam.: 36 mm (1.4 in.)

Height: approx. 97 mm (3.8 in.)

2347 Aspherical Magnifier

High-grade magnifier for the professional viewing/appraisal of slides and other originals.

Resolution of finest details at high contrast over the entire field of vision. No visible distortion even at margins. Virtually no stray light. Correction of faulty vision from -2 to +0.5 dpt. Sliding mask for transparent and opaque originals. Eye cup rolls back.

Including neck cord.

Magnification: 4 x Lens diameter: 28 mm (1.1 in.)

Height: approx. 72 mm (2.8 in.)

134

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

2324-25 Precision Magnifier

Seite 135

High-quality lens, fully colour corrected, free of all visible aberrations. Dioptre compensation from +1.5 to -2.5 for individual eyesight adjustment. Exchangeable attachments (transparent and opaque ring) for transmitted and reflected light originals. Neck cord included. Metallic-look mount.

2324: 4x magnification 2325: 8x magnification

2324

2325

2348 Precision Magnifier

For precise viewing and measuring. With colour-corrected achromatic lens. Coated lens for razor-sharp definition. Eyesight adjustment. With 20 mm (.8 in.) measuring scale with 1/10 mm divisions (on stand surface of magnifier, unscrews).

Magnification: 7x Lens diameter: 23 mm (.9 in.)

Height: approx. 51 mm (2 in.)

2335/37 Linen Tester

Precision magnifier with biconvex lens made of optically ground silicate glass. Mount made of chrome-plated brass.

2335 2337 —————————————————— Magnification: 8x 5x Lens-ø (mm/in): 15/0.6

28/1.1

Viewing area: mm/in.

30 x 30/ (1.2 x 1.2)

20 x 20/ (.8 x .8)

Height (mm/in): 33/1.3 Dimensions (folded down) approx. cm/in

Image + Archiving

53/2.1

28x10x37 40x14x53 1.1x0.4x1.5 1.6x0.6x2.1

2337

2335

135

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 136

2323 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;magnoFlexâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Hand-held/Desktop Magnifier

2338 Base Magnifier

A functionally designed magnifier that can be used as a hand-held reading glass or as a desk-top magnifier with base for vertical or inclined viewing.

Magnification: 3.5 x Lens diam.: 56 mm (2.2 in.)

Height: approx. 62 mm (2.4 in.)

Magnifier for allround use with high-grade aspherical lens, hard-coated, made of impact-proof plastic, absolutely scratchproof. Transparent base. Large viewing field.

Magnification: Lens diameter: Viewing field diam.: Height: approx.

2331/34 Base Magnifier

4x 55 mm (2.2 in.)

62 mm (2.4 in.)

60 mm (2.4 in.)

Magnifier for allround use. Transparent base.

2331: Openings in the base permit adjustment under the magnifier.

Magnification: 10x Lens diameter: 26 mm (1 in.)

Dimensions: approx. 47 x 34 x 47 mm (WxHxD) (1.8 x 1.3 x 1.8 in.)

8934 2331

2334 8 x 2334

2333 Folding Magnifier

2334: Magnification: 8x Lens diameter: 24 mm (.9 in.)

Height: approx. 45 mm (1.8 in.)

Especially suited for quick checks and measurements of flat objects. Light-weight lens.

Base features 30 mm (1.2 in.) scale calibrated in mm.

Magnification: Lens diameter: Viewing area: Height (in use): Dimensions (folded down):

136

5x 28 mm (1.1 in.)

30 x 30 mm (1.2 x 1.2â&#x20AC;&#x153;) approx. 52 mm (2 in.) approx. 40 x 50 x 16 mm (1.6 x 2 x .6 in.)

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

2356 Pop-Up Magnifier

2355 Flash-Light Magnifier

Seite 137

Compact magnifier with LED light. Special mechanism provides for smooth „pop-up“ of loupe, which remains safely in plastic housing when not in use. LED light with separate switch is directed downwards when loupe is in viewing position and straight ahead when loup is inside housing. Required batteries: 2 x AAA (not included). Magnification: 3x, viewing area: 40 x 35 mm (1.6 x 1.4 in.)

Dimensions (loupe inside): 90 x 56 x 16 mm (3.5 x 2.2 x 0.6 in.)

Weight (without batteries): ca. 60 g (2.1 oz.)

Compact pocket loupe with light source.

Loupe swings out for use or is safely housed in cover. Can also be used as flash light.

Required batteries: 1 x AAA (not included) Magnification: Lens-ø: Dimensions (folded):

5x 21 mm (0.8 in.)

65 x 50 x 15 mm (2.6 x 2 x 0.6 in.)

Weight (without batteries): approx. 20 g (0.7 oz.)

2357-59 Illuminated Magnifier

2360 3 x 2357 3 x 2358 3 x 2359

2339 Pocket Microscope

Large 2x loupe with integrated 4x segment.

Illumination with adjustable angle. Sturdy housing with rubber coating.

Required batteries: 2 x AA (not included) 2357

2358

2359

Lens-ø (mm/in)

62/2.4

75/3

86/3.4

Length (mm/in)

156/6.1 197/7.8 215/8.5

Weight (g/oz)

68/2.4

104/3.7 133/4.7

30 x magnification. With focussing mechanism and illumination of viewing field.

Required batteries: 2 x AA (not included) Dimensions: (WxHxD):

2336 Replacement Lamp

Image + Archiving

approx. 140 x 39 x 22 mm (5.5 x 1.5 x .9 in.)

For pocket microscope 2339.

2.5 V, E 10. Lens form.

137

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 138

Negative Filing Sheets For the orderly and protected storage and archiving of negative strips and single negatives. Including cover sheet with index. Margin punched with Euro-holes. Different material versions: - top and bottom sides made of milky white glassine - top side transparent acetate, bottom side paper - top and bottom sides acetate, so especially suitable for producing contact prints because the film can be left in the sleeve.

Negative Filing Sheets for 35 mm film For 42 35mm negatives: 7 strips each 6 negatives. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 cm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2510: 2515: 2520: 2530: 2535:

Glassine 100 sheets Glassine 25 sheets Acetate/Paper 100 sheets Acetate 100 sheets Acetate 25 sheets

For 42 35mm negatives. 7 strips each 6 negatives. With tear-off memo sheet.

Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 mm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2511: Glassine 100 sheets 2521: Acetate/Paper 100 sheets For 40 35mm negatives. 10 strips each 4 negatives. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 315 mm (10.2 x 12.4 in.)

2513: Glassine 2518: Glassine

100 sheets 25 sheets

The following negative filing sheets for 60 mm film are ideal for 35 mm negatives with re-order strips.

138

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 139

Negative Filing Sheets for 60 mm film For 4 negative strips to hold: 4,5 x 6 cm: 16 negatives 6 x 6 cm: 12 negatives 6 x 7 cm: 12 negatives 6 x 8 cm: 8 negatives 6 x 9 cm: 8 negatives 35 mm negatives with re-order strips: max.

24 negatives (4 strips with up to 6 negatives) Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 mm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

24x36

2510/15 2520 2530/35

2511 2521

Glassine 100 sheets Glassine 25 sheets Acetate/Paper 100 sheets Acetate 100 sheets Acetate 25 sheets 24x36

2610: 2615: 2620: 2630: 2635:

24x36

4,5x6

Negative Filing Sheets for 9 x 12 cm (4 x 5") negatives

6x6

For 4 negatives. With tear-off paper bottom sheet. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 315 mm (10.2 x 12.4 in.)

2710: Glassine

100 sheets

6x9

2610/15 2620 2630/35

2513/18

24x36

Negative Filing Sheets for 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7") negatives For 2 negatives. Dimensions: approx.

260 x 310 mm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2725: Glassine

25 sheets

9x12 13x18

4x5"

2710

Image + Archiving

2725

139

07_Image + Arch

25.06.2004 11:38 Uhr

Seite 140

Transparent Slide Sleeves

For orderly and safe storing and filing of framed slides. Plasticizer-free PP film without chemical effect on the slides. Margin punched with Euro-holes. Dimensions: approx.

250 x 315 mm (9.8 x 12.4 in.)

2570 2580 2590

For 20 35mm slides in 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2“) frames

2690

For 12 6 x 6 slides in 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8“) frames

2570: Upper and lower side transparent.

Extra-thin foil. 25 sheets.

2580: Upper and lower side transparent.

10 sheets.

2590: Upper side transparent, lower side milkwhite. 10 sheets.

2690: Upper side transparent, lower side milkwhite. 10 sheets.

For 6 6 x 7 slides in 8,5 x 8,5 cm (3.3 x 3.3“) frames 2790

2500/2516 Filing Binder

2790: Upper side transparent, lower side milkwhite. 10 sheets.

4-ring binder for Kaiser negative filing sheets and transparent slide sleeves.

Dimensions approx. 300 x 320 mm (WxH): (11.8 x 12.6 in.)

Back: approx. 60 mm (2.4 in.)

2500: Filing binder, empty 2516: Filing binder, complete with 25 negative filing sheets of glassine for 35 mm-film and blank for table of contents.

140

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr

Seite 141

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr

Seite 142

Cutting Edge

ting software – business cards, greeting cards, CD inlays and much more – a clean and precise cut is the minimum you should grant to your own printout.

Trimmers using a rotary blade offer a lot of advantages and are especially safe.

Trimmers with interchangeable cutting heads can provide different „cutting edges“.

According to the dictionary „cutting edge“ means „the edge of a cutting tool in contact with the work during a machining operation“. And that’s the definition we will use. But for „cutting edge“ you might also find explanations like „up-to-date“ or „state-of-the-art“ or „leading position“, and here we are right again.

Those who „do“ pictures themselves, either in a photo lab or with an ink jet printer, need a trimmer.When you consider, what can be „produced“ with your computer using up-to-date prin-

142

Cutting quality is definitely the most important issue, this means a clean and accurate cutting edge. Blade, counter-blade and the guiding of the cutting head are the crucial factors.

Additional features like format markings, scales, grid patterns and guide rails make positioning and aligning easy.

Cutting length, cutting capacity and table size are the determining factors in choosing the best trimmer. Whether you use the trimmer as a professional tool or just with your hobby: in any case you can find a suitable trimmer on the following pages – so trim up your prints.

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr

Seite 143

4315 Cutting Ruler Cuts paper, foils and film. Transparent pressure ruler with attached metal guide bar for the cutting head. Three exchangeable cutting heads with rotary blade for line cutting, zigzag cutting and perforation. Pressure ruler with cm and inch scales, format markings and grid pattern, cutting mat with scales and line-up squares.

Cutting length: approx. 31 cm (12.2 in.)

Cutting thickness: max. 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)

Cutting mat: approx. 38 x 10 cm (15 x 4 in.)

4302 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;micro cutâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Trimmer Sub-compact trimmer for small format work like passport photographs, business cards etc. Rotating circular blade made of stainless steel in a closed plastic housing. Automatic paper clamping at cutting position.

Transparent pressure strip. Base plate surface with cm scale and format markings.

Cutting length: Cutting thickness: Dimensions (WxHxD):

Trimmers

approx. 15 cm (5.9 in.) max. 0,5 mm (0.02 in.) approx. 24 x 5.5 x 13 cm (9.4 x 2.2 x 5.1 in.)

143

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr

Seite 144

4304/4308-11 Safety Trimmer With self-sharpening rotating circular blade in a closed plastic housing. Automatic paper clamping for precision cutting. Transparent clamping bar. Two angle guides with cm/inch scale. Baseboard with cm/inch scale, angle and format markings.

4304: mini cut Cutting length: approx. 250 mm (9.8 in.)

Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

36 x 7 x 21 cm (14.2 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4308: hobby cut 1 Cutting length: approx. 320 mm (12.6 in.)

Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

43 x 7 x 21 cm (16.9 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4309

4309: hobby cut 2 Cutting length: approx. 460 mm (18.1 in.)

Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

57 x 7 x 21 cm (22.4 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4308

4310: hobby cut 1 same as 4308, but with additional cutting head for deckle cut 4311: hobby cut 1 same as 4308, but with additional cutting heads for deckle cut, perforation and zig-zag cut.

4304

4312 Cutting Heads Set Comprises three cutting heads for perforation, deckle and zig-zag cut and a special cutting bar. The cutting heads can be replaced with the regular cutting head of the hobby cut 1 (4308, manufactured 9/01 or later).

4312

144

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr

Seite 145

4317-19 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;profi cutâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Safety Trimmer Self-sharpening circular blade in closed plastic housing. Grinded counter-blade.

Automatic paper clamping at cutting position. Transparent paper-holding strip. Angle stop with cm and inch scales and detachable magnetic back stop. Base plate with cm and inch scales and format markings.

Provisions for wall mounting.

4317: profi cut 1 Cutting length: 360 mm (14.2 in.)

Cutting thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)

Dimensions 555 x 92 x 367 mm (WxHxD): (21.8 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

4318: profi cut 2 Cutting length: 510 mm (20.1 in) Cuttung thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)

Dimensions 705 x 92 x 367 mm (WxHxD): (27.8 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

4319: profi cut 3 Cutting length: 720 mm (28.3 in.)

Cutting thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)

Dimensions 915 x 92 x 367 mm (WxHxD): (36 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

Trimmers

145

08_Timmers

25.06.2004 11:40 Uhr

Seite 146

4102-03 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;multi cutâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Safety Trimmer Guillotine-type trimmer with honed top and bottom blades. Hand pressing rail. Angle guide with cm/inch scale and detachable magnetic back stop.

Sturdy baseboard with cm/inch scale and format markings.

4102: multi cut 1 Cutting length: Cutting thickness: Baseboard size: Dimensions (WxHxD): 4103: multi cut 2 Cutting length: Cutting thickness: Baseboard size: Dimensions (WxHxD):

146

330 mm (13 in.)

1.5 mm (0.06 in.)

33 x 16.5 cm (13 x 6.5 in.)

42 x 28 cm (16.5 x 11 in.)

460 mm (18.1 in.)

1.5 mm (0.06 in.)

46 x 16.5 cm (18.1 x 6.5 in.)

55 x 28 cm (21.7 x 11 in.)

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 147

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 148

Bright Moments Much has been written and published about the significance of light and illumination for video recording. It is beyond dispute that modern camcorders can provide quite useful results even in low light levels. It is also beyond dispute that high-quality shots can only be achieved with high-quality lighting.

Brilliant colors and great depth of field demands a lot of light, and if you want to use light as a pictorial tool you will often need more than one light source. A videolight should be ready, when there is not enough available light or when - for example - faces of persons are too dark in backlight situations.

The light should be as small as possible – camcorders are also becoming smaller and smaller –, it should have its own power supply to keep you mobile and it should provide as much light as possible for the longest possible time. So far it is (still) not possible to fulfill all these wishes at the same time. Long operating times will ask for large and heavy batteries, because the small high-performance halogen lamps have a rather high power consumption.

Great technical improvements with LED lamps (light-emitting diodes) have reduced some of the present limitations, and the „digiNova“ is one of the first video lights with this technology getting closer to the ideals mentioned above. Small dimensions and almost two hours of continuous operation with regular batteries or rechargeables are really progress.

If you need more light output and a wider range, you have to use halogen lamps, either with a battery-operated camcorder light or with an AC-operated videolight placed on a stand for professional lighting and composing jobs.

148

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 149

3282 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;digiNovaâ&#x20AC;&#x153; LED Video Light Super compact camcorder light using LED technology.

White high-performance LED combined with facetted reflector and cylinder diffusor for even light distribution. Light intensity comparable to 8 watt halogen light.

Powered by four regular AAA-batteries or rechargeable NiMH batteries.

Accessory shoe with blocking screw.

Specifications: Oprating voltage: Color temperature: Operating time with set of batteries/charge: LED service life: Weight (w/o batteries): Dimensions (WxHxD):

4,8 - 6 V approx. 5.500 Kelvin

up to 2 hours up to 200,000 hrs 60 g (2.1 oz.)

47 x 80 x 57 mm (1.9 x 3.1 x 2.2 in.)

Supplied without batteries.

Video Lights

149

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 150

93396-97 „camlight TOP 35“ Videolight Compact camcorder light with 35 W, 3200 K halogen lamp. For use with Kaiser PP TOP (1.1 Ah) batteries, Sony NP 55/77, Panasonic VW-CBS 2 and 6 V camcorder batteries from JVC, Hitachi or other similar makes; Canon BP-E722 and BP-E77KE batteries can be used with an extra adapter (accessory). Operating time with fully charged PP TOP battery approx. 12 minutes, with other batteries up to 25 minutes depending on battery capacity. State of charge displayed with three LEDs. Light tilts forwards by 25°. 1/4“ tripod thread. Socket for mains adapter.

93396: camlight TOP 35 without battery 93397: camlight TOP 35 with PP TOP battery and charger Specifications: Operating voltage: 6 V Weight (w/o battery): approx. 165 g (5.8 oz.)

Dimensions approx. 60 x 115 x 72 mm (WxHxD): (2.4 x 4.5 x 2.8 in.) (w/o battery)

93389 Mains Adapter Enables the camlight TOP 35 to be run for unlimited time from the mains. 4 m (13 ft.) long connecting cable with plug-in transformer.

93399 Adapter for Canon Batteries

3008

To fit Canon-type BP-E 722 and BP-E 77 KE batteries to all camlight TOP videolights.

93399

150

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 151

93302 „camlight TOP 20 basic“ Videolight Compact camcorder light with 35 W, 3200 K halogen lamp. For use with Kaiser PP TOP (1.1 Ah) batteries, Sony NP 55/77, Panasonic VWCBS 2 and 6 V camcorder batteries from JVC, Hitachi or other similar makes; Canon BP-E722 and BP-E77KE batteries can be used with an extra adapter (accessory). Operating time 38 minutes. Light tilts forwards by 25°. 1/4“ tripod thread. Socket for mains adapter.

Operating voltage: 6V Weight: approx. 160 g (5.6 oz.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 60 x 115 x 72 mm (2.4 x 4.5 x 2.8 in.)

Supplied without battery.

93398 PP TOP Battery Rechargeable battery for camlight TOP 35 (93396-97, camlight TOP 20 basic (93302) and former camlight TOP units. Operating voltage: 6 V, Capacity: 1,1 Ah, Weight: 200 g (7 oz.)

93343 Charger for PP TOP (93398) battery and other camlight TOP units equipped with this battery.

3027

93320 „camlight 250“ Videolight 250 watt safety light with service-free rechargeable battery in carrying case. Front attachment with four light flaps and diffuser. Angle of light emersion steplessly variable from 35° to 55°.

Heat-resistant reflector housing. Mounting possible in two ways: either flat on housing - with the light tiltable by 25° - or raised on the pivoting bracket. In this position the light can be tilted upwards and downwards by a total of 100°.

Stand thread 1/4 “. On/off switch. Running time approx. 20 min at full charge. Charging time max. 14 hours. Including charger.

Halogen lamp: 24 V, 250 W, 3200 K Cord: spiral cable, max. 1.6 m (5 ft. 3 in.)

Battery capacity: 6.5 Ah Weights: light approx. 600 g (1 Ibs. 5 oz.) battery bag approx. 6 kg(13 Ibs. 4 oz.)

Dimensions: light approx.66x145 (100) x125 mm (2.6 x 5.7 [3.9] x 4.9 in.) battery bag approx. 240 x 210 x 120 mm (9.4 x 8.3 x 4.7 in.)

93391 Conversion Filter Complete front attachment with light flaps and conversion filter for 93320 and 93392.

Video Lights

3036

151

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

Seite 152

93310 „camlight 100“ Videolight Compact safety lighting unit for battery operation. Front attachment with light flaps and safety glass. Heat-resistant reflector housing can be swivelled up to 90° upwards for indirect lighting. Adjustable angle of light escape (variable focussing). Accessory shoe for mounting to camera. 1/4 “ tripod thread.

On/off switch. Power pack with lamp holder and maintenance-free lead acid battery.

Operating time approx. 25 min. under full load. Can also be operated with 50 W lamp for approx. 50 min. Battery charge indicator (LED). Charging time max. 14 hours depending on degree of discharge. Complete with charger.

Technical specifications of lamp: Operating voltage: 12 V Halogen lamp: 100 W, 3200 K Cord: spiral cord, max 1.5 m (5 ft.)

Weight: approx. 425 g (15 oz.)

Dimensions: approx. 60 x 120 x 90 mm (WxHxD) (2.4 x 4.7 x 3.5 in.)

Technical specifications of battery: Rated capacity: 6.5 Ah/7 Ah Weight: approx. 3030 g (6 1/2 Ibs.) Dimensions: approx. 175 x 150 x 71 mm (WxHxD) (6.9 x 5.9 x 2.8 in.)

93339 „camlight 100“ Videolight With 100 watt, 3200 Kelvin halogen lamp.

For 12 V battery operation. Cable with XLR connector. Supplied without batterie.

3028

93313 PP 100 Power Pack

3054

12 V/6.5 Ah lead acid battery for „camlight 100“. Also suitable for other 12 V units with XLR connector.

93314 Charger For PP 100 Power Pack.

93324 Conversion Filter 93324

152

Safety front attachment with conversion filter for „camlight 100“ (93310/93339).

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr

93392 „videolight 150“ Videolight

Seite 153

150 W safety light for mains operation.

Unlimited continuous operation without extra cooling. Four light flaps. Variable mounting possibilities. Can be used on camcorder or stand.

For detailed description see page 33.

3003

93307-08 „videolight 8“ Videolight

300 W safety light for mains operation.

Unlimited continuous operation without extra cooling. Light tilts upwards for indirect lighting. Handle with accessory shoe and tripod thread.

93307: with four light flaps 93308: without lightflaps For detailed description see page 33.

3058 3038

3047 Portable Lighting Kit

300 W „videolight 8 S“ with four light flaps, black light-metal light stand with maximum height of 2.2 m (7.2 ft.), joint with umbrella mount, holding rod and white studio umbrella, 37 cm (14.5 in.) diameter, in carrying bag with handle and adjustable shoulder strap Length of bag: approx. 82 cm (33 in.)

3058 3038

93356 „Mini“ Portable Lighting Kit

Consisting of 300 W video light “videolight 8 S“ (93307), clamp (1512), reflector/shootthrough lighting umbrella (1522) and mounting rod (1520) in sturdy carrying case.

Dimensions: approx. 385 x 265 x 100 mm (15.2 x 10.4 x 3.9 in.)

3058 3038

Video Lights

153

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:43 Uhr

Seite 154

93304 „videolight 6“ Videolight

1000 W safety light for mains operation.

Low-noise blower cooling for unlimited continuous operation. Four barn doors. Lamp head and handle can be tilted. Two mounting possibilities.

For detailed description see page 32.

3075 3094

93325 „videolight 4“ Videolight

2000 W safety light for mains operation.

Low-noise blower cooling for unlimited continuous operation. Four barn doors. Lamps can be switched individually. Additional switch for modelling light. Lamp head and handle can be tilted. Two mounting possibilities.

For detailed description see page 32.

3075 3094

93375 „studiolight 1000“ Safety Lighting Unit

1000 W safety light for mains operation.

Low-noise blower cooling. Rotatable fourflap gate. Receiving slot for safety screen or filter. Variable focussing. Can be switched to modelling light. Mounting bracket pivots for standing or hanging attachment. Light tilts and can be locked in any position.

For detailed description see page 31.

3075 3094

3061 „studiolight 2000“ Safety Lighting Unit

1000 W safety light for mains operation.

Low-noise blower cooling. Four barn doors.

Two receiving slot for safety screen and filter.

Lamps can be switched individually and to modelling light. Mounting bracket pivots for standing or hanging attachment. Light tilts and can be locked in any position.

For detailed description see page 30.

3075 3094

154

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:43 Uhr

3049 Portable Lighting Kit

Seite 155

Blower-cooled „videolight 6“ 1000 W safety light with four barn doors, black light-metal light stand with maximum height of 2.2 m (7.2 ft.), joint with umbrella mount, holding rod and white studio umbrella, 90 cm (35.4 in.) diameter, in carrying bag with handle and adjustable shoulder strap Length of bag: approx. 82 cm (33 in.)

3075 3094

93359 „studio“ Portable Lighting Kit

Complete lighting kit in strong case for easy access and safe carrying. Contains two “studiolight 1000“ lights (1000 W), two 5041 joints , two 5031 light stands, one studio umbrella and one 3084 holding bracket.

Dimensions of case: approx. 505 x 355 x 160 mm (20 x 14 x 6.3 in.)

3075 3094

Light Stands

Stands made of polished aluminum tube with air-cushion center column.

3402: 3403: 3404:

72 (28 99 (39 101 (40

-

210 cm, bis max. 3 kg 83 in., max. load 6.6 lbs.)

244 cm, bis max. 6 kg 96 in., max. load 13.2 lbs.)

325 cm, bis max. 10 kg 128 in., max. load 22 lbs.)

For detailed description see page 41.

Stands made of black anodized light-metal.

5031: 5033: 5035:

52 (20 88 (35 104 (41

-

220 cm, bis max. 1,5 kg 86 in., max. load 3.3 lbs.)

250 cm, bis max. 6 kg 98 in., max. load 13.2 lbs.)

290 cm, bis max. 10 kg 114 in., max. load 22 lbs.)

For detailed description see page 42.

Video Lights

155

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:43 Uhr

Seite 156

93296 Accessory Bracket

For raised mounting of a light, microphone etc. next to the camcorder lens. Folding.

With antitwist pin for exact right-angled mounting on camcorder. Widened threepoint rest on bottom side. Camera with mounted bracket stands firmly on all flat surfaces.

A 1/4 tripod threat.

93378 Twin Bracket

For mounting two lights, light and microphone etc. on the camcorder or on stands.

Bracket with pivot stay and two accessory shoes. For raised fitting to camcorders with awkwardly placed accessory show.

Width: approx. 130 mm (5.1 in.)

Height: approx. 102 mm (4 in.)

Tripod threat: A 1/4.

93381 Accessory Adapter

For mounting a light, microphone, monitor etc. on camcorders without accessory shoes. Suitable for 6 V powered Sony, Panasonic, JVC, Hitachi, Sharp and similar camcorders. The adapter is mounted between camcorder and battery .

Can also be used as an adapter for nonsystem 6 V batteries. Sliding and detachable shoe.

156

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:43 Uhr

96008 Video Shoulder Pod

Seite 157

Combined chest and shoulder pod for camcorders. Pivoting mounting plate with 1/4â&#x20AC;? thread, securing pin and non-slip face.

Length steplessly adjustable and lockable in any position.

Folded flat the pod can stay fitted to the camcorder. Adjustable strap.

96009 Counter Display

With four 96008 Video Shoulder Pods in individual packaging.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 21.5 x 37.5 x 19.5 cm (8.5 x 14.8 x 7.7 in.)

93334 Charger

For camcorder rechargeable batteries, Sony Type NP 55/77 or similar makes, e.g made

by Fuji, Ricoh, Sanyo, Nikon etc.

Charging time depending on battery capacity approx. 8 to 12 hours. Cord 4 m (13 ft.1 in.).

Video Lights

157

09_Video Lights

25.06.2004 11:43 Uhr

Seite 158

96653 Video-Transfer For copying cinefilms (8 mm, 16 mm) and slides on to video. Backprojection screen with fine-grained 100 x 75 mm (3.9 x 3.0 in.) viewing screen. Built-in reversing mirror for true-sided image. Integrated close-up lens with 55 mm (2.2 in.) diameter. Strong table base with adjustable feet and spirit level on base. Stepless height adjustment.

Dimensions (BxHxD) approx. 230 x 190 (230) x 142 mm (9.1 x 7.5 (9.1) x 5.6 in.)

96655 Video Transfer Set Consisting of the video transfer unit 96653, table stand 96654 for the camcorder, filter adapter 96656 for projection lenses from 25 to 62 mm (1 to 2.4 in.) diameter and closeup lens 2 (14249).

96654 Table Stand Strong table stand with 1/4â&#x20AC;? mounting thread.

For stable positioning of camcorders, particularly when combined with the video transfer unit 96653. Table base with adjustable feet and spirit level in base. Stepless height adjustment from 96 to 136 mm (3.8 x 5.4 in.)

Dimensions (BxHxD) approx. 182 x 101 (141) x 117 mm (7.2 x 4 (5.6) x 4.6 in.)

96656 Filter Adapter For fastening filters and close-up lenses with 49 mm diameter to projection lenses. The filter adapter is simply pressed on. It automatically adapts to lens diameters from 25 mm to 62 mm (1 to 2.4 in.). Only suitable for lenses that project out of the projector casing when in use.

96657 Filter Adapter Set

96653

158

96654

96657

Consisting of 96656 filter adapter and 14249 close-up lens. Used in conjunction with the video transfer unit (e.g. Art. No. 96653) to copy slides onto video when the slide projector does not focus down to short distances and does not have a filter mount for close-up lenses.

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 159

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 160

Accessories - Who in the World Would Need That?

Are accessories really needed with cameras, that can do everything, and even do this fully automatically? The answer is „No“, when we talk about candid shots, about snapping a memorable occasion or scene. As soon as you start taking more complicated pictures you will find, that – from time to time – you could have used something to help you to make shooting easier or to achieve a particular result.

For example with the small displays on the back of digital cameras: it is pretty difficult to see the image when there is sunlight from the back or from the side.

That is why a monitor shield should be

part of your basic digital camera equipment. But you will only use such an accessory, if it does not make your camera bulky, if it folds down when you do not need it, if it can be kept attached to your camera and if it will fit many different cameras – in one word: it must be convenient.

In these days many cameras – analog and digital – have a built-in flash gun.

But that can not always do the job, it does not have enough power or coverage. If you can connect an external flash gun, you might need a flash bracket, a bounce flash shoe or a flash adapter.

A small tripod should always be at hand, because there are enough occasions to use it: when you use longer exposure times or the self-timer, a table-top or a clamp-on tripod is indispensible. It can be a steady companion, because it is light-weight and compact.

160

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 161

But if a more „weightily“ camera has to be mounted on a tripod, then you will need a ball head. It sets the camera to any desired position and holds it firmly.

Depending on the weight of the camera/lens combination you will find different sizes of ball heads designed for different loads.

If a tripod is used, you will most probably connect a cable release in order not to shake the camera when you press the release button. There is also a clever adapter in case your camera lacks a connection for a cable release.

Filters are and will remain the most important camera accessory no matter if you shoot digital or analog. Despite the possibilities of image processing software – not any digital photographer will use one – there is one thing for sure: the quality of the initial shot should be as good as possible.

Camera Accessories

Looking back at our question, now the wheel comes to full circle: Without quality you can not capture fantastic pictures, at least not with reasonable effort.

If – with respect to your photgraphs or your photographic activities – specific quality issues are important for you, you can surely not do without the proper accessory.

161 161

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 162

6072-73 „digiShield“ Digital Camera Monitor Glare Shield Shields lateral and angular incidence of light from the LCD monitor and improves the visibility of the monitor image on digital cameras. Fits many different digital cameras.

Folds down completely and serves also as a cover and a screen protector. Locks when folded. Coil spring supported side flaps will keep the glare shield in opened position. The shield is attached to the tripod socket, fastening screw with 1/4“ thread and socket.

Regardless of the position of the tripod socket on the camera the glare shield can be attached so that it is positioned properly on the monitor and fits tightly to the camera body.

6072: for monitors up to 1.5“ 6073: for monitors up to 1.8“

162

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

1000 Flash Bracket

Seite 163

Light metal bracket with resilient contact surface. Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread and tripod bush.

Length: Width:

1100 Angle Bracket

16.5 cm (6.5 in.), 2.8 cm (1.1 in.)

Collapsible. Grip with hand strap. Hinged camera bracket of light metal with resilient contact surface.

Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread and tripod bush.

Length: approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.)

Width: approx. 2.8 cm (1.1 in.)

Height of grip: approx. 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)

1107 Angle Bracket

Collapsible. Hinged camera bracket of light metal with resilient contact surface. Slot-on foot for flash units. widened three-point rest on bottom side.

Camera with mounted bracket stands firmly on flat surfaces.

Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread and tripod bush.

Length: approx. 16.2 cm 6.4 in.)

Width: approx. 6.5 cm 2.6 in.)

Height of grip: approx. 15.1 cm 5.9 in.)

1501 Remote Flash Trigger

Electronic flash trigger for lag-free firing of a second flash unit. No cord required. With hot flash contact. Range: 20 m (66 ft.), depending on the guide number of the flash unit in use and the brightness of the surroundings.

With 1/4“ tripod bush Dimensions: approx. 29 x 40 x 38 mm (1.1 x 1.6 x 1.5 in.)

Camera Accessories

163

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 164

1201 Bounce Flash Shoe

For indirect flashing. With ball-and-socket joint for stepless movement in all directions.

Accessory shoe detachable. 1/4” mounting thread with lock nut. Reflector umbrella holder 9.2 mm diameter. For fastening to accessory shoe or stands. Stand thread 1/4” with removed slot-on foot 3/8”.

Height: approx. 90 mm (3.5 in.)

1205 Bounce Flash Shoe

For indirect flashing. Steplessly adjustable.

With synchro cable and flash shoe.

Designed for cameras with and without hot flash shoe.

Height: approx. 47 mm (1.9 in.)

Cable: approx. 30 cm (1 ft.) long

1200 Bounce Flash Shoe

For indirect flash illmuniation. Steplessly adjustable. With 1/4” tripod bush. Fits into accessory shoe or tripods.

Height: approx. 45 mm (1.8 in.)

1300 Flash Shoe Adapter

For cameras with hot flash shoe and flash equipment without hot flash shoe. With synchro flash socket.

Height: 16 mm (0.6 in.)

1301 Flash Shoe Adapter

For cameras without hot flash contact and flash equipment with hot flash contact. With approx. 30 cm (11.8 in.) synchro cable, shoe mount and 1/4” tripod bush. Also designed for attaching flash equipment with hot flash contact on tripods.

Height: 16 mm (0.6 in.)

164

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

1211 Accessory Shoe

Seite 165

For mounting flash guns with 1/4â&#x20AC;? thread.

With threaded pin (1/4â&#x20AC;?) and lock nut.

Height: 25 mm (1 in.)

1212 Accessory Shoe

With 2 screws. For individual mounting.

Height 5 mm (0.2 in.)

1311 Flash Socket

Nipple to Standard DIN 190003 (PC) for connecting flash equipment.

Package of 10 pieces.

1313 Flash Socket Adapter

1322 Triple PC Flash Outlet

1326 Right Angle Male Plug 1327 Right Angle Female Plug

Camera Accessories

For connecting flash equipment with standard PC plugs to Leica cameras of the M1 M3 series.

For simultaneous use of up to three flash units with standard PC plugs

With plug to DIN 19003 (PC) for self-fitting to flash cables. With soldering tags.

With nipple to DIN 19003 (PC) for self-fitting.

With soldering tags. Is needed for instance to lengthen a flash cable with PC plug.

165

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 166

1420-26 Extension Cord

For connecting flash equipment. With rightangle plug and socket (PC).

1420: 0.5 1423: 2.0 1424: 3.0 1425: 5.0 1426: 10.0

1441 Connecting Cord

1450-51 Spiral Cord

m m m m m

( 1 ft. 8 in.) ( 6 ft. 10 in.) ( 9 ft. 10 in.)

(16 ft. 5 in.)

(32 ft. 10 in.)

For flash equipment.

Heiland and PC plugs.

Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

For use in connecting flash equipment and as extension cord.

Length (extended): 200 cm (6 ft.7 in.)

1450: PC plug – PC socket 1451: PC plug – Heiland plug

1450

1408-09 Flash Cable

Professional flash connecting cable with spiral coil for pull relief. Signal red, length approx. 10 m (33 ft.)

1408: PC plug and jack plug ø 3.5 mm 1409: PC plug and jack plug ø 6.35 mm

1408

166

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

1512 Flash Clamp

Seite 167

For simple attachment of flash guns.

Removable accessory shoe on ball joint.

Tiltable to all sides in infinite steps, lockable in any position. Additional connecting thread 1/4“. With reflector umbrella holder ø 9.2 mm. Clamp is impact-resistant plastic with non-slip rubber studs.

Clamp span: max. 40 mm (1.6 in.)

Height: approx. 90 mm (3.5 in.)

1522 Flash Reflector Umbrella

White, waterproof coated nylon fabric. For use as a reflector and for shoot-through lighting, with small lamps or flash equipment.

Rods chrome or nickel-plated.

Diameter: approx. 37 cm (14.6 in.)

Height: approx. 30 cm (11.8 in.)

Rod-ø: 7.9 mm

1520 Mounting Rod

Enables attachment of a flash reflecting umbrella in main flash direction. For use in conjunction with flash tilting head 1201, flash clamp 1512 and umbrella holder 5041.

Length: approx. 200 mm (8 in.)

Reception hole for umbrella: approx. 8 mm (.3 in.)

Camera Accessories

167

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 168

6033-34 Table Tripod

Light-weight and compact tripod for compacts and digital cameras. Ball head can be locked in any position. Camera platform with 1/4“ mounting thread. Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx.14.5 cm (5.7 in.)

Height (set up): approx.10.3 cm (4.1 in.)

Weight: approx. 55 g (2 oz.)

6033: silver colored 6034: titanium colored

6036-37 Table Tripod

Light-weight and compact tripod for compacts and digital cameras. Five-section telescopic feet. Ball head can be locked in any position. Camera platform with 1/4“ mounting thread. Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx. 11 cm (4.3 in.)

Max. height (set up): ca. 14 cm (5.5 in.)

Weight: ca. 82 g (3 oz.)

6036: silver colored 6037: titanium colored

96000 Table Tripod

96001 6 x 96000

6031 Table Tripod

Dimensions (folded): approx. 70 x 48 x 137 mm (2.8 x 1.9 x 5.4 in.)

Weight: approx. 250 g (8.8 oz.)

Small tripod with lockable ball-and-socket head. For compact and digital cameras.

Camera platform with 1/4“ mounting thread.

Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx. 14.5 cm (5.7 in.)

Height (set up): approx. 10.8 cm (4.3 in.)

Weight: approx. 55 g (2 oz.)

6031

Display holds 16 pieces.

16 tripods

168

Stable folding table tripod for camcorders, SLR cameras, compact cameras, microphones and lights. Can also be used as a grip for compact cameras. Large pivoting camera platform with rubber overlay, tiltable, also for portrait format shots. Immersible anti-twist pin for camcorder. 1/4“ mounting thread.

Height (set up): approx. 10 cm (3.9 in.)

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

5012 Table-Top Tripod

Seite 169

Extra small collapsible tripod. 1/4“ connecting thread. Can also be used as microphone stand.

Height: approx. 60 mm (2.4 in.), folded approx. 100 mm (3.9 in.).

5005 Pocket Tripod

Clamp-on and table-top tripod with ball-andsocket head and 1/4“ connecting thread.

Screw-on clamp with 37 mm (1.5 in.) max. span. Can be used as clamp-on stand after unscrewing feet, which may be stored in the stand’s centre tube.

Height (without feet): approx.130 mm (5.1in.)

Weight: approx. 205 g (7.2 oz.)

6021 Quick-Release Connector

6022 Quick-Release Connector Plate

6013/18 Ball-and-Socket Head

For quick mouting of camera on tripod. The upper part ist mounted on the camera’s tripod bush and stays there, the lower part is attached to the tripod. 1/4“ connecting thread and tripod bush. Securing pin screwed in for exact positioning and to protect against unintentional twisting. Dimensions: approx. 50 x 80 x 27 mm (2 x 3.1 x 1.1 in.)

Matches quick-release tripod connector 6021.1/4“ thread. Securing pin screwed in for exact positioning and to protect against unintentional twisting.

6022

1/4“

connecting thread with lock nut. Handy lever screw for clamping the ball. 3/8“ tripod thread with 1/4“ thread adapter.

6013 Lightweight model Weight: approx. 45 g/1.6 oz.

Height: approx.

50 mm/2“ Socket-ø: approx. 24 mm/1“ Max. load: approx. 1 kg/2.2 lbs

Camera Accessories

6021

6018 Mediumweight model 110 g/3.9 oz.

67 mm/2.6“ 30 mm/1.2“ 2 kg/4.4 lbs

6013

6018

169

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

Seite 170

6012 Professional Ball-and-Socket Head

Professional ball-and-socket head for medium format and heavy SLRs. Lever screw for clamping the ball. Adjustable friction brake for fine setting. Rotating panorama base with fluid system, fixing screw and scale in twodegree divisions from 0° to ± 180°. Scale ring also turns when base is fixed.

Interchangeable camera mounting thread 3/8“ / 1/4“. Tripod Thread 3/8“ with 1/4“ thread adapter.

Weight: approx. 1240 g (2 Ibs. 12 oz.)

Height: approx. 145 mm (5.7 in.)

Base diameter: approx. 75 mm (3 in.)

Loading capacity: 10 kg (22 lbs.) max.

6011 Professional Ball-and-Socket Head

Professional ball-and-socket head. Lever screw for clamping the ball. Adjustable friction brake for presetting of friction. Rotating panorama base with fluid system, fixing screw and scale in three-degrees divisions form 0° to ± 180°. Interchangeable camera mounting thread 3/8“/ 1/4“. Tripod thread 3/8“ with 1/4“ thread adapter.

Weight: approx. 660 g (1 Ibs. 7 oz.)

Height: approx. 125 mm (4.9 in.)

Base diameter: approx. 56 mm (2.2 in.)

Loading capacity: 8 kg (17.6 lbs.) max.

6017 Ball-and-Socket Head

Medium-weight version. Lever screw for fixing the ball. Rotating panorama base with fluid system, fixing screw and scale in fivedegree divisions from 0° to ± 180°. Camera mounting thread 1/4“. Tripod thread 3/8“ with 1/4“ thread adapter.

Height: approx. 100 mm (3.9 in.)

Base diameter: approx. 45 mm (1.8 in.)

Weight: approx. 300 g (10.6 oz.)

Loading capacity: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.) max.

170

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr

6400 Assorted Screw and Thread Adapters

6460 Bracket Screws

6482 Thread Adapters

6385 Spirit Level

Seite 171

Contents: 3 mounting thread adapters 1/4“- 3/8“ 3 camera-case screws 1/4“ - 3/8“ 3 camera-case screws 1/4“ - 1/4“ 2 bracket screws 1/4“ - 3/8“ 8 thread adapters 3/8“ - 1/4“

Aluminium thread stem, extruded plastic body. ø 30 mm (1.2 in.). B 1/4“, A 3/8“.

Pack of two.

Made of nickel-plated brass.

Outer thread: B 3/8“ Inner thread: A 1/4“ Pack of 25

One level each for vertical and horizontal shooting position. With mounting shoe and 1/4“ tripod bush.

Dimensions: approx. 20 x 25 x 35 mm (.8 x 1 x 1.4 in.)

6386 Spirit Level

Circular bubble in metal mounting, self-adhesive. For permanent attachment to cameras, tripods etc. Can also be screwed on.

approx. 25 mm/1“

Camera Accessories

171

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 172

6505 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;Varioâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Slide Duplicator

For making 1:1 slide copies and detail copies up to 2.5:1 (stepless). Camera mounting via T-2 adapter (6510-19).

Length: approx. 170 mm (6.7 in.)

6510-19 T-Mount Adapter

6849-77 Lens Hood for Standard Lenses

Thread adapter for mounting lenses, bellows, slide duplicators, focussing helical mounts, etc. with T-mount on various 35mm reflex cameras.

6510: M 42 6511: K bayonet (Pentax and others) 6512: Nikon 6513: Minolta MF 6514: Canon MF 6515: Olympus 6517: Yashica/Contax 6518: Minolta (Autofocus) 6519: Canon EOS (Autofocus) Made of flexible dull black rubber. With light baffles. Metal mounting ring. Filter thread.

6849: 6852: 6855: 6858:

49 52 55 58

x x x x

0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75

6862: 6867: 6872: 6877:

62 67 72 77

x x x x

0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75

Dimensions in mm

6801-07 Lens Hood for Wide-Angle Lenses

For wide-angle and zoom lenses from 28 mm focal length. Made of flexibel dull black rubber. With light baffles. Metal mounting ring.

6801: 6802: 6803: 6804: 6805: 6806: 6807:

172

49 52 55 58 62 67 72

x x x x x x x

0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

6809-18 Snap-On Lens Cap

Seite 173

Reliable protection by clamp-on design for snapping on to filter thread of lens.

6809: 6811: 6812: 6813: 6814: 6815: 6816: 6817: 6818:

6900-92 Lens Cap

Diameters are the inside dimensions of the lens cap.

This corresponds with the outside diameter of the lens (or filter) which is covered with the lens cap.

6056 Lens Cap Keeper

Camera Accessories

ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø

46 49 52 55 58 62 67 72 77

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Made of flexible plastic, black.

6916: 6917: 6918: 6919: 6920: 6921: 6922: 6923: 6924: 6925: 6926: 6928: 6929: 6930: 6931: 6932: 6933: 6934: 6935: 6936: 6937: 6938: 6939: 6940: 6941: 6942: 6943: 6944:

ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

6945: 6947: 6948: 6949: 6950: 6951: 6952: 6953: 6954: 6955: 6956: 6957: 6958: 6960: 6961: 6962: 6964: 6965: 6968: 6970: 6972: 6975: 6980: 6985: 6990: 6900: 6992:

ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø ø

45 mm 47 mm 48 mm 49 mm 50 mm 51 mm 52 mm 53 mm 54 mm 55 mm 56 mm 57 mm 58 mm 60 mm 61 mm 62 mm 54 mm 65 mm 68 mm 70 mm 72 mm 75 mm 80 mm 85 mm 90 mm 100 mm 120 mm

Protects against loss of lens cap. A selfadhesive plate is stuck to the lens cap and attached to the lens by an elastic cord.

173

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 174

6101-02 Cable Release

Black fabric covering.

6101: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)

6102: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.) threaded rotating tip

6101

6102

6103-05 Cable Release

With locking screw.

Black fabric covering.

6103: Lenght 15 cm (6 in.)

6104: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)

6105: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.), threaded rotating tip

6103, 6104

6105

6107-08 Cable Release 6107

With auto-lock disc.

Black fabric coating.

6107: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)

6108: Lenght 50 cm (19.7 in.) threaded rotating tip

6108

6119/21 Cable Release 6119

Heavy-duty version with T-flange grip. Black plastic covering. Threaded rotating tip.

Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

6119: with locking screw 6121: with auto-lock disc

6121

6113

6113/15-16 Cable Release

Metal spiral sheath with PVC covering.

Threaded rotating tip.

6113: with locking screw, 25 cm (9.8 in.)

6115: with auto-lock disc, 25 cm (9.8 in.)

6116: with auto-lock disc and T-flange grip, 50 cm (19.7 in.) long

6116

6115

6128-29 Cable Release

With locking screw. Metal gauze sheath with PVC covering. With T-flange grip and threaded rotating tip.

6128: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.)

6129: Length 100 cm 39.4 in.)

174

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

6184 Professional Cable Release

Seite 175

Upper part with formed grip and auto-lock disc. Interchangeable release with black plastic covering and threaded rotating tip.

Release travel adjustable.

Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

6148 Cable Release Adapter

6154 Cable Release Adapter

6143-44 Pneumatic Remote Release

For connecting the standard cable release to cameras with awkwardly placed connecting thread. L- shape.

Threaded rotating tip.

For the use of conventional cable releases on cameras (e.g. auto focus or compact cameras) which have only a socket to connect an electric release, or do not have a cable release bush.

6143: With 5 m (16 1/2 ft.) long release tube and winding reel. 15 cm (5.9 in.) long cable release with threaded rotating tip.

6143

6144: With 10 m (33 ft.) long release tube, which can be devided in 2 x 5 m (2 x 16 1/2 ft.). 15 cm (5.9 in.) long cable release with threaded rotating pin.

With winding reel and plastic box.

6144

Camera Accessories

175

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 176

6785 „Neopren“ Camera Strap

Shoulder area made of flexible high-grade neoprene, surfaced with fabric, non-slip underside. Very comfortable. Lenght variable with quick adjustment. For cameras with round or flat eyelets. Width approx. 38 mm (1.5 in.), length max. 120 cm (3 ft. 11 in.).

Color: black

6751 Camera Strap

6791 Professional Camera Strap

Made of high-grade polyester webbing. With woven-in rubber filaments on inside to prevent slipping. Ends of strap with quick-release safety locks. Length adjustable. For cameras with round or flat eyelets. Width: approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.) Length: approx. 110 cm (3 1/2 ft.)

Color: black.

Extremely hard-wearing woven strap with widened shoulder area. Non-slip shoulder area. Length can be adjusted on both sides.

For cameras with round or flat eyelets. Width approx. 12/50 mm (.5/2 in.), length approx.

110 cm (3 ft. 7 in.)

Color: black

6771 Professional Camera Strap

Highly durable woven strap with non-slip shoulder pad on the underside. Length adjustment at both ends. For cameras with round or flat eyelets.

Width: approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Length: approx. 100 cm (39.4 in.)

Color: black

6741 „compact“ Camera Strap

Neoprene shoulder strap for compact and digital cameras. Can be comfortably worn over the shoulder or around the neck.

Simple catch. Integrated loop ensures that the strap is connected to the camera in a matter of seconds.

Width: approx. 14 mm (0.6 in.)

Length: approx. 89 cm (35 in.)

Continuously variable length with sliding buckle.

Color: black

176

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

6041 Protective Cover

6032 Binocular Mount

6501 Film Protector Bag

Seite 177

For binoculars. Both eyepieces are covered.

With lugs for use with strap.

For mounting binoculars on tripods.

Attachment at center focusing. 1/4â&#x20AC;&#x153; tripod socket.

Max. span 20 mm (0.8 in.)

For protection of films from X-rays emitted at airport controls. Made of paper especially laminated with lead foil on both sides. Also suitable as heat and dampness protection.

Capacity: 22 35-mm or 18 rollfilms.

Dimensions: approx. 65 x 155 x 235 mm (2.6 x 6.1 x 9.3 in.)

6500

Notice: No guarantee when damaged by Xray devices with particularly strong radiation.

10 x 6501

6503 Safety Film Container

6503 10 Safety Film Containers

Camera Accessories

To prevent films up to ISO 3200/36° against low-intensity X-rays in airport control points.

Holds four 35 mm or APS films or two 60 mm roll films and one 35 mm/APS film. The container can be opened from two sides. It also protects against dust, splashing water, sunlight or other heat sources.

Dimensions: 107 x 60 x 43 mm (4.2 x 2.4 x 1.7 in.)

Notice: No guarantee when damaged by Xray devices with particularly strong radiation.

177

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 178

4129 Film Loader

For loading bulk 35-mm film into cartridges in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m (98 ft.). With frame counter and remainingfilm meter.

Dimensions: approx. 130 x 110 x 80 mm (5.1 x 4.3 x 3.1 in.)

4124/27 Film Cartridges

For 35-mm film. For self-loading with bulk film material. Clamp fastener on reel axle.

4124: metal type, 5 pcs.

4127: plastic type, 5 pcs.

4128 DX Labels

4125 Film Cartridge Opener

For coding film cartridges with self-loaded film or changing existing codings. Consisting of three sheets of adhesive labels (each with 10 labels) made of special conductive foil and one sheet of insulating labels in different sizes.

For opening 35-mm film cartridges.

Dimensions: approx. 140 x 40 x 40 mm (5.5 x 1.6 x 1.6 in.)

178

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

4132 Film Leader Retriever

6389â&#x20AC;&#x201C;90 Changing Bag

Seite 179

For extracting 35 mm film leader from cartridges into which the film has been wound.

Plastic casing with one fixed and one sliding tongue. Simple use.

For working with light-sensitive material where no darkroom is available. Made of special black light-proof fabric with rubber lining. Infrared light-proof. With two hand holes and light-proof zipper.

6389: approx. 68 x 76 cm (26.8 x 29.9 in.)

6390: approx. 40 x 43 cm (15.7 x 16.9 in.)

6381-82 Matt Spray

To remove undesirable reflections on shiny surfaces such as enamel, glass, plastic, high-gloss paint, chrome, etc. The photo matt-spray produces an even matt finish, dries quickly, adheres well and can be easily removed with water. 400 ml (13.5 floz.) can.

6381: transparent 6382: black

6504 Filter Container

For safe and protected storage of filters up to 62 mm (2.4 in.) in diameter. Any number of containers can be mounted like a tower on top of one another. For neat and organized storage in accessory bags, shelves, etc.

With blank label.

Dimensions: approx. 70 x 70 x 20 mm (2.8 x 2.8 x .8 in.)

Camera Accessories

179

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 180

Important Auxiliaries: Filters Basically optical filters work in digital photography the same way as they do with film. Used properly, they favorably affect the light hitting the film or the sensor to enhance the image. Digital image processing can not always easily duplicate the filter effect.

The filter effects can be seen as a way of image processing prior to taking a picture, and this works not only easyly and quickly, but will sometimes make impossible shots possible.

Neutral UV filters absorb the very short ultra-violet wavelenghts, which - especially in the mountains, in high altitudes and over long stretches of water - produce a misty background caused by atmospheric stray light. Digital cameras have a lower UV sensitivity, but with some cameras the appearance of color fringes can be reduced.

Skylight filters are slightly reddish colored UV filters and give pictures a warm touch. Otherwise they have the same characteristics as neutral UV filters. They can also be used with digital and analog cameras.

180

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 181

Conversion filters are color correction filters, which convert light of a certain color temperature to another color temperature. Digital photography does not need them, but films are balanced for a specific color temperature. A KB 12 filter is used when you shoot on daylight film under artificial light conditions at approximately 3000 Kelvin. Using an artificial light film under daylight conditions requires a KR 12 filter.

Polarizing filters can enhance a blue sky, suppress unwanted glare and improve color saturation in general. In addition reflections on glass, water, shiny surfaces, e.g. on cars or on sunlit leaves, are eliminated. Polarizing filters can also reduce very high contrasts which can be an advantage with digital cameras with a low dynamic range.

Linear and circular polarizing filters have the same effects, their difference lies in camera compatibility. SLR cameras with split-beam metering or autofocus will normally require a circular polarizing filter whereas compact cameras analog and most fo the digitals - will get along with a linear polarizing filter. If you are not sure what to use, a circular polarizer will keep you on the safe side.

Camera Accessories

181 181

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:07 Uhr

Seite 182

A Neutral Density (ND) or Gray filter reduces the amount of light entering the camera lens without affecting the color rendition. This helps to obtain a slower shutter speed to enhance blurring of movement for example, or will result in a larger lens aperture thus enabling better separation of foreground and background. With digital cameras you may also use a lower ISO setting to achieve this, but if that is not possible, a neutral density filter will be the only solution.

Close-up lenses reduce the minimum focusing distance of any lens. With +1, +2, +3 and +4 diopters and a standard lens you will get focusing distances less than 100, 50, 33 or 25 cm (40, 20, 13 or 10 in.). Two or more close-up lenses can be combined.

182

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:08 Uhr

Seite 183

When shooting black-and white, colors are converted to different gray tones. Modern black-and-white films handle this very well.

Filters can help to enhance particular attri-

butes or to achieve special effects. These filters can not be used with digital photography.

Yellow-green filters lead to a sophisticated rendition of green in landscape photography. Especially mixed colors with green will have a stronger contrast towards pure green.

Yellow filters are also advantageous for landscape photography, for example white clouds stand out much better against a blue sky. Once again green will contrast better. Yellow filters will also tone down skin blemishes when shooting portraits.

Orange filters provide for a lighter rendition of yellow and red, whereas blue is much darker. Landscape and architectural photos are richer in contrast and plasticity.

Red filters are perfect for generating dramatic moods in landscape photography as a blue sky becomes very dark and white clouds shine brightly. An equally intense contrast can be achieved in architectural photgraphy when shooting a bright facade in front of a blue sky.

Camera Accessories

183 183

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:08 Uhr

Seite 184

Kaiser Filters

filt er MC Co nv R ers 1,5 ion filt er Co KR nv ers 12 ion (85 1 filt )) er Po KB lar izin 12 gf (80 ilte B 1) r (l Po ) ine lar a izin r) gf ilte r (c Cl os irc eula up r) len s1 Cl os eup len s2 Cl os eup len s3 Cl os eup len s4 Ye llo w filt er (8 1) Ye ) llo wgre en filt Or er an (11 1 ge )) filt er ( 1 Re 6 1) ) d filt er (25 1 ))

filt er R

Sk ylig ht

filt er MC

Sk ylig ht

UV

UV

filt er

1,5

General properties: Metal mount with front thread, Coated. UV filter MC (102..) and Skylight filter MC (104..) multi-coated.

Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # ø 27 mm

10127

10227

10327

10427

-

-

-

15727

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ø 28 mm

10128

-

10328

-

-

-

-

15728

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ø 30 mm

10130

10230

10330

10430

-

-

-

15730

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ø 30,5 mm 10131

10231

10331

10431

-

-

-

15731

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ø 37 mm

10237

10337

10437

-

-

-

15737

-

-

14337

-

-

-

-

-

10137

ø 40,5 mm 10140

10240

10340

10440

-

-

-

15740

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ø 43 mm

10143

10243

10343

10443

-

-

-

15743

-

-

14343

-

-

-

-

-

ø 46 mm

10146

10246

10346

10446

11746

12746

15646

15746

14146

14246

14346

14446

13246

13446

13546

13746

ø 49 mm

10149

10249

10349

10449

11749

12749

15649

15749

14149

14249

14349

14449

13249

13449

13549

13749

ø 52 mm

10152

10252

10352

10452

11752

12752

15652

15752

14152

14252

14352

14452

13252

13452

13552

13752

ø 55 mm

10155

10255

10355

10455

11755

12755

15655

15755

14155

14255

14355

14455

13255

13455

13555

13755

ø 58 mm

10158

10258

10358

10458

11758

12758

15658

15758

14158

14258

14358

14458

13258

13458

13558

13758

ø 62 mm

10162

10262

10362

10462

11762

12762

15662

15762

14162

14262

14362

14462

13262

13462

13562

13762

ø 67 mm

10167

10267

10367

10467

11767

12767

15667

15767

14167

14267

14367

14467

13267

13467

13567

13767

ø 72 mm

10172

10272

10372

10472

11772

12772

15672

15772

14172

14272

14372

14472

13272

13472

13572

13772

ø 77 mm

10177

10277

10377

10477

11777

12777

15677

15777

14177

14277

14377

14477

13277

13477

13577

13777

ø 82 mm

10182

10282

10382

10482

-

12782

15682

15782

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1)

corresponding Kodak filter designation

184

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:08 Uhr

Seite 185

Rodenstock Professional Filters Re df ilte rd ark

filt er lig ht Re d

filt er Or an ge

Gr ee nf ilte r

filt er Ye llo wgre en

filte rd ark Ye llo w

4) Ye llo me w filt diu er m

filte r (N Dx ND

Po lar (ci izing rcu f lar ilter )

Sk ylig ht

UV

filt er

filt er

General properties: Slimline metal mount with front thread (except circular polarizing filter), hard-coated, Schott-glass.

Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. ø 27 mm

16127

16227

16327

-

16527

15827

16627

15927

16727

16827

16027

ø 30,5 mm

16131

16231

16331

-

16531

15831

16631

15931

16731

16831

16031

ø 37 mm

16137

16237

16337

-

16537

15837

16637

15937

16737

16837

16037

ø 39 mm

16139

16239

16339

-

16539

15839

16639

15939

16739

16839

16039

ø 40,5 mm

16140

16240

16340

-

16540

15840

16640

15940

16740

16840

16040

ø 43 mm

16143

16243

16343

-

16543

15843

16643

15943

16743

16843

16043

ø 46 mm

16146

16246

16346

-

16546

15846

16646

15946

16746

16846

16046

ø 49 mm

16149

16249

16349

16449

16549

15849

16649

15949

16749

16849

16049

ø 52 mm

16152

16252

16352

16452

16552

15852

16652

15952

16752

16852

16052

ø 55 mm

16155

16255

16355

16455

16555

15855

16655

15955

16755

16855

16055

ø 58 mm

16158

16258

16358

16458

16558

15858

16658

15958

16758

16858

16058

ø 60 mm

16160

16260

16360

16460

16560

15860

16660

15960

16760

16860

16060

ø 62 mm

16162

16262

16362

16462

16562

15862

16662

15962

16762

16862

16062

ø 67 mm

16167

16267

16367

16467

16567

15867

16667

15967

16767

16867

16067

ø 72 mm

16172

16272

16372

16472

16572

15872

16672

15972

16772

16872

16072

ø 77 mm

16177

16277

16377

16477

16577

15877

16677

15977

16777

16877

16077

ø 82 mm

16182

16282

16382

16482

16582

15882

16682

15982

16782

16882

16082

ø 86 mm

16186

16286

16386

16486

16586

15886

16686

15986

16786

16886

16086

ø 95 mm

16195

16295

-

16495

16595

15895

16695

15995

16795

16895

16095

ø 100 mm

16196

16296

-

16496

16596

15896

16696

15996

16796

16896

16096

ø 105 mm

16197

16297

-

16497

16597

15897

16697

15997

16797

16897

16097

ø 112 mm

16198

16298

-

16498

16598

15898

16698

15998

16798

16898

16098

ø 127 mm

16199

16299

-

16499

16599

15899

16699

15999

16799

16899

16099

Camera Accessories

185 185

10_Camera Accesso

25.06.2004 16:08 Uhr

Seite 186

6542-97 Filter Adapter Ring

For mounting filter and front attachments to lenses with deviating mounting threads.

Precision metal rings with dull black surface.

Lens thread â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Filter thread 6547: 27 - 37 6584: 28 - 37 6585: 30 - 37

6550: 49 - 52 6551: 49 - 55 6552: 49 - 58

6588: 34 - 37

6555: 6556: 6557: 6558:

52 52 52 52

-

49 55 58 62

6589: 6542: 6543: 6544:

6561: 6562: 6563: 6564:

55 55 55 55

-

52 58 62 67

6586: 30,5 - 37 37 37 37 37

-

43 46 49 52

6591: 39 - 43 6592: 6593: 6594: 6548:

40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5

-

43 46 49 52

6595: 43 - 46 6596: 43 - 49 6549: 43 - 52

6567: 58 - 55 6568: 58 - 62 6566: 58 - 67 6569: 62 - 58 6573: 67 - 58 6576: 72 - 58

6545: 46 - 49 6546: 46 - 52 6597: 46 - 55

96657 Filter Adapter Set

Consisting of 96656 filter adapter and 14249 close-up lens.

Used for example in conjunction with the video transfer unit (Art. No. 96653) to copy slides onto video when the slide projector does not focus down to short distances and does not have a filter mount for close-up lenses. The filter adapter is suitable for 25-62 mm projection lenses. Only suitable for lenses that project out of the projector case when in use.

186

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

Seite 187

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

Seite 188

Neat Appearance A neat appearance is always positive and this applies also to technical devices like a camera, that very often accompanies its owner to various places. Reliable, proper functioning of photographic equipment is even more important. Especially the camera, (hopefully) being a reliable companion on holidays, at events or family celebrations is very often exposed to the effects of weather conditions, that can be the cause for breakdowns of camera functions or of inferior picture quality, which can result in our losing documents of some irretrievable occasions.

These are good reasons to give special attention to the „cleaning & care“ issue and to complement the camera equipment with some important accessories.

Electronics are today a vital part of each camera, their interfaces need „good connections“, connections to memory cards in digital cameras, connections to batteries and rechargeables. Connections can be crucial for the proper function of a camera, but these interfaces are also exposed to exterior influences. Cleaning cards for memory card connectors or a contact cleaner should always be at hand, because you know from experience, that these problems do not turn up when you are at home.

The camera is an opticial device with „a visual function“ which is why it always needs to be „clear and clean“.

Lenses and optical attachments, viewfinder eyepieces, displays and monitors should be free from dust, dirt, finger prints, water marks etc. Cloths, sprays, brushes and compressed air are the appropriate tools for the cleaning and care of your optical surfaces and these should be with you wherever you go.

188

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

Seite 189

6672-74 Cleaning Cards

For mechanical cleaning of memory card contacts in digital cameras, MP3 players, PDAs, card readers and adapters. Removes fouling and dust and dirt particles by moving the card back and forth several times in the card slot. Package includes micro fibre cleaning cloth for camera body, display etc.

6672 CompactFlash Cleaning Kit Includes one cleaning card, 10 exchangeable cleaning inserts for at least 20 cleaning procedures and a micro fibre cleaning cloth.

6673 Memory Stick Cleaning Kit Includes two cleaning cards eqipped with a special 3M cleaning tape and a micro fibre cloth. Each card can be used up to ten times.

6674 SD-Card/MultiMedia Cleaning Kit Includes two cleaning cards with a special 3M cleaning tape and a micro fibre cloth.

Each card can be used up to ten times.

6662 Display and Optics Cleaning Kit

6666 Display and Optics Cleaning Pen

Cleaning + Care

Includes â&#x20AC;&#x17E;Display Cleanerâ&#x20AC;&#x153; pump spray and a micro fibre cleaning cloth. Alcoholic cleaning fluid in 25 ml (0.8 floz.) pump spray dispenser for well directed application on the area to be cleaned and subsequent removal using the micro fibre cloth. Leaves no residues. Suitable for optical and plastic glass.

Cleaning pen with conductive fibre brush on one side and a microfibre cloth tip on the opposite side. Brush for removing dust and static charges. Cleaning cloth tips for wet cleaning for fingerprints and greasy spots.

Cleaning liquid included. Exchangeable carrier for large or small cloth tips. Ten tips each are included.

189

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

Seite 190

6328 Micro Fibre Cleaning Cloth

Completely fluff-free, grease-absorbing cloth for gentle, yet effective cleaning of optical lenses (glasses, lenses, magnifiers), but also suitable for CDs, records, photos, slides, TV/monitor screens, etc. Washable without loss of cleaning properties. Hemmed edges.

In different colours and designs.

Size: 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in.)

6327 Assortment of 25 x 6328

6330 Rodenstock Micro Fibre Cloth

Completely fluff-free, grease-absorbing cloth for gentle, yet effective cleaning of optical lenses (glasses, lenses, magnifiers), but also suitable for CDs, records, photos, slides, TV/monitor screens, etc. Takes up all moisture, oil and grime. Machine or hand washable without loss of cleaning properties.

Colour: White, in a black pocket.

Size: 17.5 x 15 cm (6.9 x 5.9 in.)

Display holding 30 cloths

6695 Optical-Glass Cleaning Paper

Special paper, free from silicon, for cleaning optical glass.

Pack of 4 tolls of 30 sheets each.

6694 36 rolls of Optical-Glass Cleaning Paper

6368 Moist Cleaning Cloth

6369

Cleaning cloth made of felted paper, soaked in an active cleaning agent free from silicon.

For fast and thorough cleaning, handling even tough dirt. The cleaner dissovles grease, has an antistatic effect and prevents fogging. Suitable for coated and uncoated optical glass, optical plastics, spectables, mirrors etc.

Pack with 12 individually wrapped cloths.

120 Moist Cleaning Cloths

190

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

6323 Contact Cleaner

6678 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;Xerapolâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Plastic Polish

Seite 191

For cleaning oxidized and dirty battery contacts and contact surfaces in eletric devices. Handy pencil form with twist-out fibreglass tip.

Polish paste for removing scratches from acrylic glasses, for example on shooting tables or light boxes. Also suitable for acrylic glass parts of cars, motorbikes, caravans, mobile homes, furniture etc. Not suitable for matt acrylic surfaces.

Tube with 50 g (1.8 oz) of polish paste

6679 Acrylic Glass Cleaner

6364 Leather Cleaning Cloth

6697 Cleaning Set

6699 Cleaning Set

Cleaning + Care

Special cleaning spray for acrylic glass.

Environment-friendly. Removes fingerprints, residues of grease, felt marker and other contaminations. Streak and smear free cleaning.

Anti-static effect. Bio-degradable.

Pump spray bottle with 250 ml (8.5 floz.)

Genuine leather. For cleaning optical glass.

5 pcs.

Consisting of optical-glass cleaning fluid, optical-glass cleaning paper and blower brush.

Consisting of lens cleaning paper, cleaning leather and blower brush. For cameras, lenses, binoculars, spectacles etc.

191

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr

Seite 192

6301 Lens Brush

6311 Blower Brush

In plastic tube. With lipstick twist mechanism, not lubricated.

Round brush with rubber blower bulb.

6313 28 x 6311

192

6314 Blower Brush

Flat brush with large rubber blower bulb.

6315 Blower Brush

Round brush with large rubber blower bulb.

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:47 Uhr

6361 Antistatic Cloth

Seite 193

Lint-free, especially treated cloth.

Dimensions: approx. 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.)

6363 Special Antistatic Cloth

High-grade lint-free cloth with chainstitched border for cleaning and antistatic treatment of films, glass, and lenses. Also suitable for phonograph records, plastic parts and plastic-coated surfaces.

Dimensions: approx. 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.)

6362/65/67 Cotton Gloves

To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives, optical glass, etc. 100 % cotton, washable at all temperatures.

6362: One pair, size 15 6365: One pair, size 12 (standard size) 6367: Three pairs, size 12

6317 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;Clear Gearâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Compressed Air

6318

9 x 6317

Cleaning + Care

For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine mechanical and electronic equipment and components. Compressed air in Aluminium monobloc can. With spray valve and flexible capillary tube for inaccesible places.

Environment-friendly, without CFC, harmless for ozone, 100 % non-flammable. No dangerous gas/air mixture can arise. Trouble-free in operation. Gas pressure is stable until can is empty. Will keep indefinitely.

Inhalt: 200 ml (6.8 floz.), min. 150 g (5.3 oz.)

193

11_CleaningCare

25.06.2004 11:47 Uhr

Seite 194

6320 Compressed Air Cleaner Easy-to-use and enviroment-friendly compressed air cleaner with compressor, e.g. for service workshops and labs, studios and wherever dust has to be eliminated quickly and thoroughly. Quick-release connection for air hose. Adjustable pressure switch, display on pressure gauge. Automatic operation: Turns on automatically when the storage tank pressure is below 4 bar and automatically shuts itself off when full (at 6 bar). Very low noise level (30 dB/A at 1 m distance).

Safety valve, water separator.

Motor power: Aspiration: Pressure tank: Spiral air hose: Weight: Dimensions:

194

135 Watt 20 l/min 1.5 l approx. 5 m (16 ft) long approx. 17 kg (37 Ibs.) approx. 44 x 18 x 28 cm (17.3 x 7.1 x 11 in.)

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 195

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 196

Accompaniments As our tools become smaller, lighter and more independent, cellphones, disc players, MP3 players, PDAs and cameras are now with us wherever we go - shopping, meeting with friends, in discos, at family celebrations, on weekend trips and on holidays. Micro electronics, wireless technology and digitization make it possible.

As the camera became digtal, film mutates to a memory card, „photographic equipment“ needs less space and photo bags must either be small or multi-functional these days.

The cleverly designed Kaiser bag assortment is geared to this simple insight. Aside from the small belt bags being like a protective second skin for compacts and small digicams, the Kaiser bags are all-purpose companions with a „photo department“. You will find many small details like the separate mobile phone bag attached to the shoulder strap, openings for the player’s headphone cable, a place for your rain jacket, inner pockets for cards and tickets or the mash pocket for the candy bar.

If the „photo department“ is not needed, it can often be removed completely and its space can be used for other things. Now you can understand why „slash\bag“, „EZpack“ and „disCover“ do not look like classic photo bags, and this has other advantages as well.

And this is why the bags presented on the following pages only are cute, convenient and, above all, practical accompaniments. You would not raise any objections to some company, wouldn’t you?

196

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 197

8238/40 „Zack micro“ Camera Bag

Belt pouch made of flexible Neoprene for subcompact cameras up to 11 x 7 x 4 cm (4.3 x 2.8 x 1.6 in.) Elastic fabric bands on both sides allows for different camera thickness. Internal memory card pocket.

Securing clip for camera strap.

Velcro closure.

8238: black 8240: silver-grey/black

8244-45 „Zack macro“ Camera Bag

Belt pouch made of flexible Neoprene for compact cameras up to 13.5 x 8.5 x 4.5 cm (5.3 x 3.3 x 1.8 in.) Elastic fabric bands on both sides allows for different camera thickness. Internal memory card pocket. Securing clip for camera strap.

Velcro closure.

8244: black 8245: silver-grey/black

8250-51 „digiTouch soft“ Camera Bag

Soft pouch for subcompact cameras.

Velvety inside lining protects camera body and monitor. Internal memory card pocket.

Large lid with Velcro closure and additional zipper underneath. Securing clip for camera strap. Belt clip. Black structured imitation leather.

8250: for cameras up to approx. 10.5 x 8 x 3 cm (4.1 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8251: for cameras up to approx. 12 x 8 x 3 cm (4.7 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8252-53 „digiTouch trend“ Camera Bag

Rugged pouch for subcompact cameras.

Velvety inside lining protects camera body and monitor. Internal memory card pocket.

Large lid with Velcro closure and additional zipper underneath. Securing clip for camera strap. Belt clip. Black nylon fabric.

8252: for cameras up to approx. 10.5 x 8 x 3 cm (4.1 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8253: for cameras up to approx. 12 x 8 x 3 cm (4.7 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

Bags

197

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 198

8803-04 „digilog 2“ Camera Bag

Belt pouch/shoulder bag for digital and compact cameras up to 11 x 7.5 x 4.5 cm (4.3 x 3 x 1.8 in.). Internal memory card pocket.

Lid with double zippers. Two elastic outside mash pockets for accessories. Belt loop and detachable shoulder strap, adjustable in length.

8803: black/silver 8804: black /cobalt blue

8821-22 „cuBag 1“ Photo/Video Camera Bag

Universal bag for smaller photo or video equipment. Light gray inner compartment with variable dividers. Main lid with mesh pocket underneath, opens away from user.

Document pocket at the body side.

Spacious front pocket with zipper, covered by the main lid with Velcro closure. Two belt loops and detachable and adjustable shoulder strap with shoulder rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment: approx. 14 x 9 x 14 cm (5.5 x 3.5 x 5.5 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

16 x 14 x 15 cm (6.3 x 5.5 x 5.9 in.)

8821: black/silver 8822: balck/cobalt blue

8823-24 „cuBag 2“ Photo/Video Camera Bag

Universal bag for medium sized photo or video equipment. Light gray inner compartment with variable dividers. Main lid with mesh pocket underneath, opens away from user. Document pocket at the body side..

Spacious front pocket with zipper, covered by the main lid with Velcro closure. Two belt loops and detachable and adjustable shoulder strap with shoulder rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment: approx. 22 x 12 x 18 cm (8.7 x 4.7 x 7.1 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

23 x 17 x 19 cm (9.1 x 6.7 x 7.5 in.)

8823: black/silver 8824: balck/cobalt blue

198

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 199

8853 „slash\bag“ Shoulder Bag Multi-purpose bag with with diagonal strap.

Main compartment with space for photo or video equipment housed in a removable tray with variable dividers and light gray inner lining. Additional space on top of the camera tray. Two zipped outside pockets and a mash pocket for smaller things. Reflective stripes. Wide shoulder strap with buckle closure and shoulder pad.

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx.

23 x 11 x 15 cm (9 x 4.3 x 9.9 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

33 x 14 x 38 cm (13 x 5.5 x 15 in.)

8854 „disCover“ Shoulder Bag Multi-purpose bag with diagonal strap. Main compartment with space for photo or video equipment housed in a removable tray with variable dividers and light gray inner lining.

Additional space on top of the camera tray.

Additional slide-in pocket and zipped mash pocket. Opening for headphone cable of CD or MP3 player. Front side with smaller zipped pocket and spacy document pocket with lid and buckle closure. Safety belt for main compartment. Wide shoulder strap with buckle closure and cell phone pocket. .

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx.

29 x 9 x 14.5 cm (11.4 x 3.5 x 5.7 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

31 x 12 x 31 cm (12.2 x 4.7 x 12.2 in.)

Bags

199

12_Bags

25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr

Seite 200

8858 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;EZpackâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Multi-Purpose Backpack Compact backpack made of elegant sleek nylon fabric. Main compartment with space for photo or video equipment housed in a removable, padded tray with lid and variable dividers. Large mesh pocket and small pocket for cash inside. Front pocket with organizer trays and mesh pocket. Reflective zipper. Adjustable shoulder strap with padded rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx.

25 x 10 x 20 cm ( 9.8 x 3.9 x 7.9 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

30 x 15 x 40 cm (11.8 x 5.9 x 15.7 in.)

8861-62 Multi-Purpose Backpack Backpack with separate compartments for camera equipment and more. Bottom part with variable dividers for medium sized SLR equipment. Upper part with large space for additional things. Two separate front pockets for small things and documents. Reflective zipper. Outside mesh pockets. Zippers with rain covers. Adjustable carrying system with chest and hip belt and grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment: approx. 30 x 15 x 16 cm (11.8 x 5.9 x 6.3 in.)

Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

33 x 20 x 43 cm (13 x 7.9 x 16.9 in.)

8861: black/silver 8862: black/cobalt blue

200

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:33 Uhr

Lab

Seite 201

201 201

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 202

The Home Lab: Pictures of an Analog World There is no doubt: The real world is analog. We understand „analog“ as the complement to „digital“. Everything that surrounds us – light, materials, sounds – we perceive as an analog presentation, as a continuous, i.e. a continuously changing „signal“.

The decision, whether you will make images of our real world as analog or digital „signals“, that is to say shoot analog or digital pictures, is of basic fundamental importance. The same applies to the further processing of the analog or digital image. Even though shooting digital or analog as a procedure is almost the same (even the cameras look very similar), the home lab as the place for analog processing is a completely different world.

Digital processing requires substantial knowledge about computers and software for processing digital ima-

202

ges. On the other hand working in a home lab needs handicraft skills and requires practical as well as specific knowledge. The enjoyment for handicraft work is the most important motivation for „making pictures“ in your own homelab. In some way the results of this work can be seen as pieces of art.

Take into consideration, that the home lab worker uses the same materials as the professional, then he could produce professional results, something you normally have to spend big money for.

Working in an own home lab is also very often a pleasing compensation for your professional work, nowadays done very often in front of a computer monitor. There are many people who do not like to continue that in their free time.

There are even more reasons to do your own processing, printing and enlarging. Your home lab offers invaluable advantages when you make enlargments bigger than 30 x 40 cm or 12 x 16“. At these scales you can clearly recognize another property of the analog image recording procedure: the continuous tone increase from the deepest shadows to the brightest highlights.

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 203

The pictures produced in a home lab are also very durable. Especiall blackand-white pictures printed on baryta paper can reach an age of more than 100 years if they are properly processed and stored. Viewing these images requires no additional tools, even the human eye is an analog sensor.

and well-engineered enlarger system and every „image craftsman“ can make an adequate and reasonable choice – analog after all (Greek: „ana“ = according to + „logos“ = reason).

The craftsman in his home lab needs suitable and reliable tools for his „picture workshop“. The core piece is the enlarger, an appliance which does the exposure by projecting the film image on the photographic paper. Kaiser offers a flexible

Photography: Ivana Grujic`

Photography: Carlo Lecuit

Lab

203 203

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 204

SYSTEM-V: A Concept with a System The Kaiser SYSTEM-V is the consistant implementation of the modular concept to an entire range of enlargers. It is not only characterized by the upgradability to different lighting heads and formats, all the items in the system are compatible with all the units. The complete modularisation of the enlar-

gers is the unmistakable feature of SYSTEM-V. It also permits an enlarger to be assembled from the various system modules to completely suit your individual needs. So you can get a model out of the box or have one tailor-made for you as well.

The hardware side of the SYSTEM-V concept is based on three separate assemblies.

1. The lighting components •

The „heads“ determine the type of light and beam, the filtration and light mixing features. They decide whether the complete machine is a color or black-and-white enlarger.

2. The format-determinative components •

„Format“ is defined here as the maximum enlargeable negative format. These components include the condensor system, the inserts for the compound negative carrier, and the enlarger lens. They decide whether the machine is a 35 mm enlarger or a medium-format one for 6 x 6 cm, 6 x 7 cm or 6 x 9 cm.

3. The dimension-determinative components These include the baseboard and column and their dimensions – The width times the depth and column height determine the overall machine sizes.

•

204

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 205

Negative format

Code no.

Focusing Enlarging

VCE 7005 AF VME 7005 AF VPE 6005 AF VCP 9005 VCP 7005 VCP 6005 VCP 3505 VPM 9005 VPM 7005 VPM 6005 VPM 3505 VP 9005 VP 7005 VP 6005 VP 3505

● ● ● ● ● 4500 ● ● ● ● ● 4505 ● ● ● ● ● 4510 ● ● ● ● ● 4550 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 4480 ● ● ● ● 4460 ● ● ● ● 4420 ● ● ● ● ● 4560 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 4471 ● ● ● ● 4530 ● ● ● ● 4426 ● ● ● ● ● ● 4540 ● ● ● ● ● ● 4470 ● ● ● ● 4465 ● ● ● ● 4425

Negative carrier

BaseLighting board

Enlarger head

Multigrade®

Color enlargers Autofocus

up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5“) up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8“) up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4“) up to 24 x 36 mm (35 mill) wall and floor projection scale display height adjustment with friction drive weight balance with roll spring automatic electronic focusing focus with fine drive max. enlargement (linear) on baseboard Scheimpflug rectification interchangeable mask/glass insert top 2) mask/glass insert bottom 2) adjustable masking strips color head with dichroic filters filter values, densitometric to 180 scale wheels illuminated white-light lever/density diaphragm double condensor filter drawer/spirit level diffuser, UV filter; IR filter red filter quick-change lens attachment filter holder direct, 75 w opal lamp reflex, 100 w cold light mirror lamp 3) 50 x 60 cm (19.5 x 23.5“) 45 x 50 cm (17.5 x 19.5“)

Type

Specials

Everything under Control

B&W enlargers

13_Lab

7,2 7,2 8,4 6,0 7,2 8,4 14,6 6,0 7,2 8,4 14,6 6,0 7,2 8,4 14,6

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

AN P AN P AN P AN P AN M AN M M

M

AN P AN M AN M M

M

AN P AN M AN M AN M

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● 1) 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1) 1) ● ● ● 1) 1) ● ● ● 1) 1) ● ● ● 1) 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

1) Multigrade head 2) AN = Anti-Newton-glass, M = mask, P = flat glass 3) Transformer required

Lab

205 205

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 206

Outer Impression such as with the VCP 7005

White light lever for simultanuous swinging out of all filters

Color mixing head

Wall projection

with 100 watt halogen cold light mirror lamp, UV and IR filter

for phot-murals, by tilting the enlarger head

•

Density aperture continuously adjustable over two aperture increments

• •

Height adjustment •

•

Adjusting dials for dichroic filters up to 180 •

•

Filter drawer for additional filter inserts 8.5 x 8.5 cm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Focusing with fine drive (not with all units)

•

Distortion correction

•

Compound negative carrier

with weight compensation by roll-off spring (not with all units)

by tilting head and lens carrier

removable, with 4 adjustable masking strips, registration pins and interchangeable format masks

•

Red filter slides in and out

Spirit level on lens stage

•

•

•

Lens •

Lock

big selection, easy to mount and exactly adjustable

for quick change of lens •

Filter holder (not with all units) swings out and can be adjusted in height, for square filters and variable contrast filters in mounts

Column •

Spirit level

Floor projection

on socket •

Feet individually adjustable in height, for best possible standing position

206

with scales and markings

• •

for photo-murals, by turning the column

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 207

. . . and Inner Values

Roll-off spring •

fatigue-proof high-performance roll-off spring with almost unlimited durability

Color mixing head inside housing magnesium die-cast, high mechanical stability, good thermal conduction

IR filter ®

made from heat-resistant TEMPAX glass

Color filters High quality optical dichroic interference filters with subtractive primary colors (non-bleaching)

Lamp •

Filter setting

•

Mixing box matt-white coating, for statistically irregular beam distribution pattern

• •

• •

Outside housing

•

•

temperature-resistant Makrolon

•

•

Diffusor plate made of neutral-color plastic, to optimize light distribution

• •

via illuminating setting wheels and swiveling levers made of light alloy.

Removable by white-light lever

12 volt/100 watt halogen cold-light mirror lamp. Luminous flux 2700 lumen. Average life time 50 hours

•

Head mount

•

aluminium die-cast, friction rollers made of chromium-plated silver steel.

Wear-resisting and maintenance-free.

Teflon bearings. Friction pressure adjustable.

Condensor system double condensor, plano-convex lenses, optically ground

•

Condensor housing

Column

aluminium die-cast

special aluminium tubing with dull black anodized surface

Negative carrier shock-resistant Makrolon with antistatic coating

Lens stage made of 30% glass-fibre reinforced Makrolon

•

Lens bellows made of Supronyl for high flexibility and long time elasticity

•

Lab

Column base aluminium die-cast, very solid honey-comb construction, with built-in spirit level

Baseboard high-compressed pressboard provides stability and freedom from vibrations. Height of baseboard feet adjustable individually

207 207

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 208

Color Enlargers SYSTEM-V General specifications: Color mixing head with dichroic interference filters, calibrated in densitometric values up to 180. Dials are indirectly illuminated. Whitelight lever for simultaneous swinging in or out of filters, with control light. Continuously adjustable density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings).

Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate and exchangeable double condensor system. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.

Removable compound negative carrier with interchangeable inserts, adjustable masking strips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.

Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tiltable for distortion correction on Scheimpflug principle. Quick change attachment for lenses. Height adjustment by hand-crank operated friction drive on plastic bearings. Wall and floor projection possible.

Wide, vibration-resistant column of embossed aluminium tubing, with dull black anodized surface, cm and inch scales and markings for enlarging scales. Matt-gray laminated baseboard with individually height-adjustable feet. Spirit level on column base.

Technical specifications: Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35 Cord: approx. 1,80 m (6 ft.)

Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35 mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)

Distance between optical axis and column base: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Can be converted into a copy stand or a slide duplicator.

Scope of supply: Incl. compound negative carrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens, without transformer.

4550/4480

4459

208

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 209

4550 VCP 9005

4460 VCP 6005

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length.

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to 80mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 6 format mask on bottom.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx.. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

4480 VCP 7005

4420 VCP 3505

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length. Can be converted to a 6 x 9 enlarger.

Color enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm) and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 7 format mask on bottom.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35 mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.

4460/4420

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx.. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Lab

209

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 210

Multigrade速 Enlargers SYSTEM-V General specifications: Multigrade速 head with dichroic color filter for use with variable gradation paper without changing the exposure time. Scale dial indirectly illuminated with index numbers in half steps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extra hard) for stepless contrast control. White-light lever for simultaneous swinging in or out of filters, with control light. Continuously adjustable density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate and exchangeable double condensor system. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.

Removable compound negative carrier with interchangeable inserts, adjustable masking strips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.

Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tiltable for distortion correction on Scheimpflug principle. Quick change attachment for lenses. Height adjustment by hand-crank operated friction drive on plastic bearings. Wall and floor projection possible.

Wide, vibration-resistant column of embossed aluminium tubing, with dull black anodized surface, cm and inch scales and markings for enlarging scales. Matt-gray laminated baseboard with individually height-adjustable feet. Spirit level on column base.

Technical specifications: Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35 Cord: approx. 1,80 m (6 ft.)

Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35 mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)

Distance between optical axis and column base: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Can be converted into a copy stand.

Scope of supply: Incl. compound negative carrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens, without transformer.

4560/4471

4459

210

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 211

4560 VPM 9005

4530 VPM 6005

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length.

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to 80mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 6 format mask on bottom.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx.. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade® filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

4471 VPM 7005

4426 VPM 3505

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length. Can be converted to a 6 x 9 enlarger.

Multigrade® enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm) and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 7 format mask on bottom.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35 mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.

4530/4426

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx.. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade® filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Multigrade is a registered trademark of Ilford Ltd.

Lab

211

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 212

B & W Enlargers SYSTEM-V General specifications: Lamp head with 75 W opal lamp, lamp adjustable. Exchangeable double condensor system. Filter drawer.

Removable compound negative carrier with interchangeable inserts, adjustable masking strips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.

Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tiltable for distortion correction on Scheimpflug principle. Quick change attachment for lenses. Height adjustment by hand-crank operated friction drive on plastic bearings. Wall and floor projection possible.

Wide, vibration-resistant column of embossed aluminium tubing, with dull black anodized surface, cm and inch scales and markings for enlarging scales. Matt-gray laminated baseboard with individually height-adjustable feet. Spirit level on column base.

Technical specifications: Lamp: Opal lamp 75 W, E 27 socket Cord: approx. 2.50 m (8 ft. 2 in.)

Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35 mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)

Distance between optical axis and column base: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Can be converted into a copy stand.

Scope of supply: Incl. compound negative carrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens.

4540/4470

4356

212

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr

Seite 213

4540 VP 9005

4465 VP 6005

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length.

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to 80mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 6 format mask on bottom.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

4470 VP 7005

4425 VP 3505

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105 mm focal length. Can be converted to a 6 x 9 enlarger.

B & W enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm) and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can be converted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and 6 x 7 format mask on bottom.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35 mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.

4465/4425

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

Focusing with additional fine drive. Height adjustment with weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism.

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Lab

213

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 214

4401 VP 350 B & W Enlarger

For sizes up to 24 x 36 mm (35 mm film) and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Floor projection possible. Removable compound negative carrier with negative masks for size 24 x 36 mm and slide sizes 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.). Optically ground single condenser. Red filter within bellows extension for dust protection. Can accomodate filter drawer.

Height adjustment by hand crank-operated friction drive on plastic bearings. Column with cm and inch scales.

The enlarger is convertible to sizes up to 6 x 9 cm and to a Color or Multigrade enlarger.

Supplied with compound negative carrier and lamp, without lens.

Specifications:

4356

4403 AN Glass Insert

Baseboard (WXDXH): approx. 400 x 420 x 25 mm (15.7 x 16.5 x 1 in.)

Height of column: approx. 760 mm (30 in.)

Maximum enlargement on baseboard: 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 4.8 in.)

Lamp: Opal lamp 75 W Cord: ca. 2.50 m (8 ft. 2 in.)

Glass insert with specially etched contact surface to prevent Newton rings.

For insertion into the upper part of the compound negative carrier of the VP 350.

Dimensions: 50 x 52 mm (2 x 2 in.)

5421 RA 2 XA Copy Adapter

214

To convert the VP 350 to a copy stand.

Horizontally adjustable. 1/4â&#x20AC;&#x153; camera thread.

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 215

Autofocus: Sharply Calculated Autofocus technology in enlargers has the special advantage of greater speed as well as the most extreme precision in focusing and has proven itself in the professional as well as the private darkroom.

Kaiser autofocus enlargers are able to use all enlarging lenses generally available with focal lengths of 50, 80 or 90 mm without any modification â&#x20AC;&#x201C; including of course lenses already at hand.

The manufacturing deviation of the actual focal length from the nominal focal length and the dependence of the effective focal length on the reproduction range can now be computed directly by the enlarger. To do so each lens is calibrated only once before the first use.

The calibration values so determined are permanently stored by pressing a button. Then the necessary compensation factors are calculated electronically to keep the automatic autofocus adjustment absolutely exact, depending on the effective focal length and the reproduction range. Once they have been entered, these setting values are permanently stored for up to three focal lengths and can be easily changed if you add or change your lens for another 50, 80 or 90 mm lens. The control unit is equipped with a selector for a focal length of 50, 80 or 90 mm.

This compensation, too, is permanently stored and is valid for all focal lengths without further calibrating.

Of course the units can be focused manually as well. When projecting on a wall, compensating for distortion on Scheimpflug principle or using lens types beyond the electronically registered focal lengths, a motor operated by two buttons on the control unit is used to focus. The motor-operated remote control is especially helpful with large projections: the sharpness is checked in the focusing plane, while the control unit with the long cable is directly next to you.

All components of the SYSTEM-V can be used on the AF enlargers and can also be used together with the automatic focusing to the extent that this is expedient.

Since each focusing operation only applies to a certain plane, with these autofocus enlargers you can also allow for different enlarging frame heights.

Lab

215 215

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 216

Autofocus Enlargers SYSTEM-V General specifications: Automatic focus adjustment by electronic autofocus facility with 50, 80 and 90 mm lenses. Convertible into 6 x 9 cm, autofocus is not possible with formats larger than 6 x 7 cm. Basic calibration and manual operation by control device.

Removable compound negative carrier with interchangeable inserts, adjustable masking strips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.

Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tiltable for distortion correction on Scheimpflug principle. Quick change attachment for lenses. Height adjustment by hand-crank via tooth-bar with additional weight compensation by a roll-off spring mechanism. Wall and floor projection possible.

Wide, vibration-resistant column of embossed aluminium tubing, with dull black anodized surface, cm and inch scales and markings for enlarging scales. Matt-gray laminated baseboard with individually height-adjustable feet. Spirit level on column base.

Technical specifications: Baseboard (WXDXH): approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35 mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)

Distance between optical axis and column base: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Scope of supply: Incl. control unit, compound negative carrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens.

4500

216

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 217

4500 VCE 7005 AF

4505 VME 7005 AF

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.).

Multigrade速 enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.).

Color mixing head with dichroic interference filters, calibrated in densitometric values up to 180. Dials are indirectly illuminated. Whitelight lever for simultaneous swinging in or out of filters, with control light. Continuously adjustable density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings).

Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate and exchangeable double condensor system. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.

Multigrade速 head with dichroic color filter for use with variable gradation paper without changing the exposure time. Scale dial indirectly illuminated with index numbers in half steps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extra hard) for stepless contrast control. White-light lever for simultaneous swinging in or out of filters, with control light. Continuously adjustable density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate and exchangeable double condensor system. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Can be converted into a copy stand or a slide duplicator.

Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35 Supplied without transformer.

4505

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

Filter holder for square filters and framed Multigrade速 filters, can be swung out and adjusted in height, with diffusor plate for integral metering.

Can be converted into a copy stand.

Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35 Supplied without transformer.

4510 VPE 6005 AF

4510

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.).

for 4500/4505:

4459

Lamp head with 75 watt opal lamp, lamp adjustable. Exchangeable double condensor system. Filter drawer.

Compound negative carrier fitted with AntiNewton glass on top and flat glass on bottom.

for 4510:

Can be converted into a copy stand.

4356

Lab

Lamp: Opal lamp 75 W, E 27 socket.

217

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 218

4472 4413 4414 5508 4473 4474 4475 4476 4408 4409 4412 4455 4568 4422 4423 4424

4541 4544 4545 4451 4453 4356 4459 4443 4542

218

Base Boards and Accessories Base Board 45 x 50 cm (17.7 x 19.7 in.)

Base Board 50 x 60 cm (19.7 x 23.6 in.)

Base Board 60 x 80 cm (23.6 x 31.5 in.)

Base Stand Columns and Accessories Column w/o weight compensation, 1 m (40 in.)

Column with weight compensation, 1 m (40 in.)

Column w/toothed rack and fine drive, 1 m (40 in.)

Column with toothed rack, 1 m (40 in.)

Column with toothed rack, 1.2 m (47 in.)

Column with weight compensation, 1.5 m (60 in.)

Wall Mount Extension Arm Enlarger Head Lower Part and Accessories Enlarger Head Lower Part Fine Drive Lens Holder Ring up to 50 mm focal length Lens Holder Ring 60 – 105 mm focal length Enlarger Heads and Accessories B&W Head, for formats up to 6 x 6 cm B&W Head, for formats up to 6 x 9 cm Color Head with Density Aperture Multigrade Head with Density Aperture Transformer with Voltage Stabilization Transformer w/o Voltage Stabilization Opal Lamp, 75 Watt Halogen Cold Light Mirror Lamp Condensor Systems Double Condensor for formats up to 35 mm Double Condensor for formats up to 6 x 6 cm

also for use with previous SYSTEM-V models also for use with VP 350 (4401)

VCE 7005 AF VME 7005 AF VPE 6005 AF VCP 9005 VCP 7005 VCP 6005 VCP 3505 VPM 9005 VPM 7005 VPM 6005 VPM 3505 VP 9005 VP 7005 VP 6005 VP 3505

SYSTEM-V

4500 4505 4510 4550 4480 4460 4420 4560 4471 4530 4426 4540 4470 4465 4425

Specs and More: A Survey

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

– – – –

– – – – – – ● ●

– – – – – – ● ●

– – – – – – ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

– – – – – – – –

– – ● ●

– – ● ●

– – ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● – – –

● ● – –

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● – – ● –

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● ● ● – ●

● ● ● ● – – ● –

● ● ● ● – – ● –

● ● ● ● – – ● –

● ● ● ● – – ● –

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● – – ● –

●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●●

4449 4583 4493

Condensor Systems Double Condensor for formats up to 6 x 7 cm Double Condensor for formats up to 6 x 9 cm Compound Negative Carrier System Compound Negative Carrier w/o Inserts Compound Negative Carrier with 6x6 Mask/AN-Glass for Border Exposure

●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● – ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● – ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● – ●

Compound Negative Carrier for 7 x 7 cm Slides ● Pair of Format Masks 24 x 36 mm (35 mm) ● Pair of Format Masks 24,5 x 36,5 mm, Border Exposure ● Pair of Format Masks 4,5 x 6 cm ● Pair of Format Masks 6 x 6 cm ● Pair of Format Masks 6 x 7 cm ● Pair of AN Glass Inserts ● Pair of Flat Glass Inserts ● Inserts AN Glass/Flat Glass ● Inserts 24 x 36 Mask/AN Glass ● Inserts 6 x 6 Mask /AN Glass ● Inserts 6 x 7 Mask/AN Glass ● Format Mask for 5 x 5 cm Slides ● Pair of Panorama Format Masks 24 x 66 mm ● Pair of Masks for own Cut-Out ● General Accessories 4495 Filter Holder ● 4496-99 Screw-On Filter Adapter ● 4448 Filter Drawer 85 x 85 mm ● 4584 4486 4491 4431 4485 4436 4487 4490 4433 4435 4434 4432 4489 4492 4494

auch für ältere SYSTEM-V Vergrößerer verwendbar auch für VP 350 (4401) verwendbar

Seite 219

4500 4505 4510 4550 4480 4460 4420 4560 4471 4530 4426 4540 4470 4465 4425

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

VCE 7005 AF VME 7005 AF VPE 6005 AF VCP 9005 VCP 7005 VCP 6005 VCP 3505 VPM 9005 VPM 7005 VPM 6005 VPM 3505 VP 9005 VP 7005 VP 6005 VP 3505

13_Lab

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

– ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●– ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●●

● Standard equipment ● Combination possible, additional components could be necessary – Combination not possible

All SYSTEM-V enlargers can be converted into copy stands using the components of the R1 copy system (see pages 68-83).

Lab

219 219

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 220

4473-76/4408-09 Column

4409

4408

4476

4475

4474/73

4472/4413-14 Base Board

5508 Base Stand

Made of aluminium tubing, dull black anodized surface, with cm and inch scales and markings for enlarging scales. With mount and fastening for lower part enlarger head 4568. Height adjustment by hand crank.

4473: Height adjustment by friction drive with plastic bearings, without weight compensation, height 1 m (40 in.)

4474: Height adjustment by friction drive with plastic bearings, with weight compensation by built-in roller-spring, height 1 m (40 in.)

4475: Rack-and-pinion height adjustment, with weight compensation by built-in roller-spring, additional 1:10 fine drive. Locking screw for fixing the adjusted height. Height 1 m (40 in.).

4476: same as 4475, but without fine drive.

4408: Rack-and-pinion height adjustment, with weight compensation by built-in roller-spring.

Locking screw for fixing the adjusted height.

Height 1.2 m (47 in.).

4409: Height adjustment by friction drive with plastic bearings, with weight compensation by built-in roller-spring, Locking screw for fixing the adjusted height. Height 1.5 m (60in.)

Matt-gray base board with column base fixed for attaching column. Spirit level in column base. Individually height-adjustable feet.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 4472: approx. 450 x 28 x 500 mm (17.7 x 1.1 x 19.7 in.)

4413: approx. 600 x 32 x 500 mm (23.6 x 1.3 x 19.7 in.)

4414: approx. 800 x 32 x 600 mm (31.5 x 1.3 x 23.6 in.)

(Dimensions without base and feet) For converting all SYSTEM-V enlargers from table to free-standing models. Also suitable for all Kaiser base boards from 45 x 50 cm to 60 x 80 cm) (17.7 x 19.7 in. to 23.6 x 31.5 in.).

Height-adjustable feet Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 580 x 510 x 595 mm (22.8 x 20.1 x 23.4 in.)

220

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 221

4412 Wall Mount

Strong wall mount for all Kaiser columns 70 mm (2.8 in.) wide. Required if projection is not made on base board but on larger-sized table or the floor, especially to achieve large enlarging scales.

Wall mounting with 6 screws. Upper part adjustable for absolutely vertical position.

Lower part with base and spirit level and space for transformer.

Maximum possible enlargement with lens f = 50 mm: 70 x 105 cm (27.5 x 41.3 in.)

L = 29x, linear.

Entire height with 1 m (40 in.) column: 1.16 m (46 in.)

Supplied with screws and dowels.

70 cm (27.5 in.)

4455 Extension Arm

4422 Fine Drive

4568 Enlarger Head Lower Part

Lab

To extend the holding arm on enlargers.

Required for large-dimension enlargements.

This increases the distance between the optical axis and the base by 80 mm (3.1 in.).

The extension arm is attached between the standard holding arm and the enlarger head.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 115 x 60 x 135 mm (4.5 x 2.4 x 5.3 in.)

For precise focusing. Two ratios (1:1 and 6:1). Upgradable on to all enlargers made from 10/94 (05 series).

Consists of condensor housing with bellows and lens stage, without condensor system and compound negative carrier. With lens adapter rings for lenses up to 50 mm and from 60 up to 105 mm focal lenght.

Quick change attachment for easy lens mounting. Also required for converting Kaiser copy stands into enlargers.

221

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 222

4544 Color Head

4459

4545 Multigrade Head

4459

4541 B & W Head

Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. Dichroic interference filters, calibration in densitometric units up to 180. Dials indirectly illuminated. White-light lever Continuously adjustable, illuminated density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate. UV filter and IR filter.

Drawer for additional filter. May only be operated with transformer 4451 and 4453.

Supplied with halogen cold light mirror lamp (12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35) Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Cord: 1.8 m (6 ft.)

Dimensions: approx. 160 x 250 x 125 mm (WxHxD) (6.3 x 5.9 x 8.8 in.)

Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. With dichroic colour filter for processing variable contrast printing papers without changing the exposure time. Indirectly illuminated scale dial calibrated in half steps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extra hard) for stepless gradation control. Whitelight lever for simultaneous swinging in and out of filters, with control light. Continuously adjustable, illuminated density aperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible light distribution due to special diffusor plate. UV filter and IR filter.

Drawer for additional filter. May only be operated with transformer 4451 and 4453.

Supplied with halogen cold light mirror lamp (12 V, 100 W, socket 6,35). Same dimensions as with 4544.

Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. Lamp adjustable. Drawer for additional filters. Supplied with opal lamp.

Specifications: Lamp: Opal lamp, 75 W Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Cord: approx. 2,5 m (8.2 ft.) with cord switch Dimensions: 145 x 150 x 245 mm (WxHxD) (5.7 x 5.9 x 9.6 in.)

4356

222

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 223

4451/4453 Transformer

Output power: 100 W Dimensions: approx. 120 x 80 x 140 mm (4.7 x 3.1 x 5.5 in.)

Available for 230 V, 240 V and 120 V Fuse: 1,6 AT (230/240 V) / 2,5 AT (120 V) 4451: with starting-current limitation and electronic voltage stabilization. For compensation of voltage deviations (for constant color temperature).

Input: 230 V, + 10%, -15%, 50 Hz Output: 11,5 V Âą 1%, 50 Hz 4453: without voltage stabilization Input: 230 V, 50 Hz Output: 12 V, 50 Hz

4459 Halogen Cold-Light Mirror Lamp

4356 Opal Lamp

4443/4449/4542 Double Condenser

12 V, 100 W, 3200 K, average service life 50 hrs. Lamp with high light yield and constant light radiation and color temperature during the entire service life.

Low heat stress on the film due to the coldlight mirror.

75 W, E 27. Average service life 100 hrs.

Lamp with bright light output. Uniform light density due to special inner coating of the bulb.

Colour temperature: 3000 K

For SYSTEM-V enlargers. Simple fitting with two coin screws on the head base.

4449: for formats up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.).

Fits all enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series).

4542: for formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.)

4443: for formats up to 24 x 36 mm (35 mm).

4449

4542

4443

Lab

223

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 224

4583 Compound Negative Carrier

For use with all negative masks and glass inserts size 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.).

Suitable for all SYSTEM-V enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series).

Adjustable guide pins for film widths 61,5 mm (rollfilm 120), 41 mm (rollfilm 127) and 35 mm film. Four steplessly adjustable masking strips for selecting the desired detail.

Two grid pins at standard hole intervals.

Dimensions: approx. 142 x 37 x 123 mm (5.6 x 1.4 x 4.8 in.)

4584 Compound Negative Carrier for 7 x 7 cm Slides

For mounted 6 x 6 slides with outer dimensions 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.). Suitable for all SYSTEM-V enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series). Four steplessly adjustable masking strips for selecting the desired detail.

Dimensions: approx. 142 x 37 x 123 mm (5.6 x 1.4 x 4.8 in.)

4493 Compound Negative Carrier for Border Exposure 6 x 6 cm

For pictures with a black border. Comes with 6 x 6 format mask for border exposure and AN glass.

Also for use with all negative masks and glass inserts size 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.). Suitable for all SYSTEM-V enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series).

Adjustable guide pins for film widths 61,5 mm (rollfilm 120), 41 mm (rollfilm 127) and 35 mm film. Four steplessly adjustable masking strips for selecting the desired detail.

Two grid pins at standard hole intervals.

Dimensions: approx. 142 x 37 x 123 mm (5.6 x 1.4 x 4.8 in.)

224

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 225

Format Masks and Inserts

For insertion into the 4583 compound negative carrier of SYSTEM-V enlargers and for 4493 compound negative carrier Dimensions: approx. 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.)

4486

4431/36/85/86/91/92 Format Masks Pairs of masks.

4486: Format masks 24 x 36 mm (35 mm) (a + b). With guide ridges for film strips and neg number read-out window.

4491: Format masks 24,5 x 36,5 (a + b).

For pictures with black border 4431: Format masks 4,5 x 6 cm 4485: Format masks 6 x 6 cm 4436: Format masks 6 x 7 cm 4492: Panorama format masks 24 x 66 mm, e.g. for Hasselblad X-pan, Noblex 135 and Mamiya 7 with 35 mm panorama insert.

4485

4436

4431

4432/4434-35 Anti-Newton Glass/Mask Pairs of inserts.

4435: AN glass/format mask 24 x 36 (b) 4434: AN glass/format mask 6 x 6 cm 4432: AN glass/format mask 6 x 7 cm 4492

4433/87/90 Glass Inserts Pairs of inserts.

4487: AN glass 4433: AN glass/flat glass 4490: Flat glass

4494

4489 Format Mask For mounted 35 mm slides with 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) outer dimensions.

4433, 4487, 4490

4494 Inserts Without cut-out. For â&#x20AC;&#x17E;do-it-yourselfâ&#x20AC;&#x153; cut.

1 pair.

4489

Lab

225

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 226

Rodenstock Enlarging Lenses Rogonar: For enlarging scales up to 4:1. For almost all B&W work, can be used for color enlarging with some restrictions.

Rogonar-S: Almost unlimited application in B & W enlarging, in color up to enlarging scales of approx. 10:1.

Rodagon-WA: Wide-angle lens for highest performance. For achieving large enlarging scales at normal distance to base board.

Schneider Enlarging Lenses Componar-S: Optimum performance at enlargement scales around 8:1.

Apo-Rodagon N: For highest standards.

Brilliant color reproduction with apochromatic correction.

Apo-Componon HM: Apochromatic corrected lens for highest demands and all enlarging scales.

Aperture scale illuminated

Componon-S: For highest demands and all enlarging scales.

Aperture presetting

Rodagon: Almost unlimited application for all B & W and color enlarging.

click-stop disengaging

13_Lab

4363 43551) 43651) 43671) 44691) 4328 4360 43411) 43401) 4327 4329

Rodagon-WA Rogonar Rogonar-S Rodagon Apo-Rodagon N Rodagon-WA Rogonar-S Rodagon Apo-Rodagon N Rodagon Apo-Rodagon N

4,0 2,8 2,8 2,8 2,8 4,0 4,5 4,0 4,0 5,6 4,0

40 50 50 50 50 60 75 80 80 105 105

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

6 3 4 6 6 6 4 6 7 6 7

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • •

40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5 40,5

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

4349 4336 43251) 43821) 4350 43261) 43841) 43371) 4338

Apo-Componon HM Apo-Componon HM Componar-S Componon-S Apo-Componon HM Componar-S Componon-S Apo-Componon HM Componon-S

2,8 4,0 2,8 2,8 4,0 4,5 4,0 4,5 5,6

40 45 50 50 60 80 80 90 100

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

6 6 4 6 6 4 6 6 6

• • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • •

43 43 30 43 43 30 43 43 43

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Code no. Designation

Lens speed

Focal length

Elements

Filter thread

max. film format 24 x 36 mm

mm

6 x 6 cm 6 x 7 cm 6 x 9 cm

24 x 36 mm

6 x 6 cm 6 x 7 cm 6 x 9 cm

1)

Suitable for Kaiser autofocus enlargers All enlarging lenses with M 39 x 1 mounting thread.

4423-24 Lens Holder Ring

For the fast mounting of lenses on SYSTEM-V enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series).

4423: for lenses up to 50 mm focal lenght 4424: for lenses from 60 to 105 mm focal lenght

226

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 227

4495 Filter Holder for Enlargers

4496-99 Screw-on Filter Adapter

Device for positioning filters and masks below the enlarging lens. For all Kaiser enlargers built after 1981. Mounted on vertical parallel rods. Height of filter tray steplessly adjustable, can be swung out of line of beam. Two grooved insertion planes for square filter plates (for filters between 64 and 67 mm (2.5 and 2.6 in.) width and 2 mm (.1 in.) max. thickness) and for adapters for screw-on filters. One grooved insertion plane for masks, pinhole diaphragms etc. up to 1.5 mm (.06 in.) max. thickness. Special holding device for framed filters for variable contrast printing papers. Supplied with red filter and diffusor plate for integral metering.

Allows for the use of screw-on filters with filter holder 4495.

4496: 4497: 4498: 4499:

4417 Gray Filter

for for for for

screw-on screw-on screw-on screw-on

filter filter filter filter

ø ø ø ø

49 52 55 58

mm mm mm mm

(1.9 (2.0 (2.2 (2.3

in.) in.) in.) in.)

For use in 4495 Filter Holder.

Reduces light intensity by two aperture increments. Filter factor 4.

Dimensions: 67 x 67 mm (2.6 x 2.6 in.)

4448 Filter Drawer

4437 Heat Filter

For all Kaiser enlargers. For filter inserts size 8.5 x 8.5 cm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

For the protection of negatives and acetate or gelatine filters in B & W enlargers against heat stress during continuous operation. Fits in suitable filter drawers.

Dimensions: approx. 70 x 70 mm (2.8 x 2.8 in.).

Labor

227

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 228

4996 Darkroom Kit „Color“ Includes: – VCP 3505 color enlarger for 35 mm films with transformer and Schneider Componar-S 2.8/50 enlarging lens – „spectral 590“ safelight – ATU 160 exposure timer – 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame – two chemical storage bottles – three lab trays – three stainless steel print tongs – a thermometer – 30 sheets of RA-4 color printing paper – print kit for color

4997 Darkroom Kit „Multigrade®“ Includes: – VP 3505 B & W enlarger for 35 mm films with Multigrade filter kit and Rodenstock 2.8/50 mm enlarging lens – safelight with Multigrade filter – 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame – two chemical storage bottles – three lab trays – two print tongs – a tray thermometer – 25 sheets of 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7“) Multigrade paper – Multigrade developer and fixer

228

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 229

4999 B & W Darkroom Kit Includes: – VP 6005 B & W enlarger for formats up to 6 x 6 cm with additional 35 mm format masks and Rodenstock Rogonar 2.8/50 mm enlarging lens – exposure timer – 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame – safelight – three lab trays – two print tongs – a thermometer – two bottles

8902 Basic B & W Darkroom Kit Includes: – VP 350 B & W enlarger with Rodenstock Rogonar 2.8/50 mm enlarging lens – safelight – 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame – two bottles – three lab trays – two print tongs – a thermometer

Lab

229

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 230

Tools for Picture-Makers The enlarger is the most important device in the darkroom. But in addition there is a wide range of supplementary tools to make exposing photographic paper easier and more reliable. The basic equipment should at least comprise a safelight for a â&#x20AC;&#x17E;safeâ&#x20AC;&#x153; basic illumination, a masking frame or easel for holding the photographic paper and a timer to control the exposure time. A combined exposure timer and meter is

230

even more convenient, because it makes determining of the correct exposure time much easier. If you do color printing, you would eventually appreciate the advantages of a color analyzer. Contact printer, test printer and focus magnifier round off the equipment.

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr

Seite 231

Developing the exposed photo paper requires lab trays (a minimum of three), print tongs, bottles for photo chemicals, graduates and beakers to measure and mix the chemicals, a process timer, a thermometer and a drying rack as basic equipment.

If you also want to do your own film developing, you will also need a developing tank with a self-loading reel, bottles, graduates and funnels for the photo chemicals, a thermometer, a process timer, film clips to hang up wet films and a pair of scissors.

Buying a print washer is a very good idea. Dish warmer, digital thermometer and print wipers make things even more convenient.

Some basic knowledge is indispensible – there are many useful books – and some exercise is also needed. For this you will need time. The reward for your efforts are pictures which in their own way are unique and which bear the distinctive hand of their „maker“.

Lab

231 231

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 232

4702-06 „promask“ Professional Masking Frame Margin stop with preclamping device, format markings and sinkable grid pins for centered positioning of photo paper. Grid pins at standard hole intervals. Frame made of non-warping moulded aluminium. Scales in cm and inch. Pneumatic spring with end position damping. Raised frame stays open. Four sliding masking strips with fast adjustment and fine setting by friction drive, lockable. Border width adjustable from 2 to 45 mm (0.08 to 1.8 in.). Each strip ist individually adjustable.

Light grey base plate. Non-slip rubber feet.

4702: For formats up to 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.) Dimensions: 524 x 70 x 468 mm (20.6 x 2.8 x 18.4 in.)

4704: For formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.) Dimensions: 630 x 70 x 515 mm (24.8 x 2.8 x 18.4 in.)

4705: For formats up to 40 x 50 cm (16 x 20 in.) Dimensions: 725 x 70 x 620 mm (28.5 x 2.8 x 24.4 in.)

4706: For formats up to 50 x 60 cm (20 x 24 in.) Dimensions: 830 x 70 x 718 mm (32.7 x 2.8 x 28.3)

4708 „topmask“ Masking Frame For formats up to 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.)

Metal masking frame with cm and inch scales. Two bilaterally guided masking bands with instant lock push buttons. Pneumatic spring with end position damping, raised frame stays open. Two separately adjustable margins for borders from 5 to 25 mm (0.2 to 1 in.). Automatic paper clamping when closing masking frame. Base plate made from heavy-duty hardboard with light grey coating to prevent reflections.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 460 x 45 x 400 mm (18.1 x 1.8 x 15.7 in.)

232

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 233

4001 Masking Frame 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.)

Metal base plate with non-slip base and dull white surface. Adjustable margins for borders from 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.). Metal dull black masking frame with cm and inch scales and snap paperholding mechanism.

Bilaterally guided self-adjusting masking bands with instant-lock push buttons.

Maximum print size 28 x 36 cm (11 x 14.2 in.).

Dimensions: (WxHxD): approx.

470 x 30 x 395 mm (18.5 x 1.2 x 15.6 in.)

4000 Masking Frame 18 x 24 cm (7 x 9 1/2 in.)

Metal base plate with non-slip base and dull white surface. Adjustable margins for borders from 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.). Plastic dull black masking frame with cm and inch scales.

Bilaterally guided self-adjusting masking bands. Maximum print size: 19 x 24,5 cm (11.8 x 1.4 x 10.8 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

330 x 25 x 275 mm (13 x 1 x 10.8 in.)

4004 Borderless Masking Frame For formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.).

Metal base plate with non-slip base and dull white surface. Printed symmetrical cm scale (zero point in centre). Format markings for 7 x 10, 9 x 13, 10 x 15, 13 x 18, 18 x 24, 20 x 25 and 30 x 40 cm (3 x 4, 3 1/2 x 5, 4 1/8 x 5 7/8, 5 x 7, 7 x 9 1/2, 8 x 10 and 12 x 16 in.). Paper stop at top of base. Two permanently magnetic formed-plastic paper holding bars. The stop profiles are tapered to prevent paper edges from bending upward.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

490 x 25 x 325 mm (19.3 x 1 x 12.8 in.)

Lab

233

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 234

4008 Contact Printing Frame

For the simultaneous printing of max. 6 film strips each with six 35 mm negatives or 7 film strips each with five 35 mm negatives on one sheet sized 20 x 25 cm (8 x 10 in.).

Hinged glass plate with retaining clips for film strips. Also variable clamping bar for short film strips. Base plate with plastic foam padding and non-slip feet.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

300 x 35 x 275 mm (11.8 x 1.4 x 10.8 in.)

4009 Test Printer

For producing test strips to determine exposure time and filter setting for enlargements.

Top with six separately opened shutters.

Turning the paper around after the first exposure makes a total of 12 exposures possible on one sheet of 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7 in.)

Dimensions: approx. 180 x 160 mm (7.1 x 6.3 in.)

4005 „focuscop“ Focus Magnifier

For reliable focus control in enlarging. Double lens system with 4 x magnification. Focus control using both eyes. Bright, distortionfree image on focussing screen, wide viewing angle.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

65 x 105 x 120 mm (2.6 x 4.1 x 4.7 in.)

4378–79 Test Negative

For exact focussing in enlarging.

4378: 24 x 36 mm (35 mm) 4379: 6 x 6/6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.4/2.4 x 2.8 in.)

234

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 235

6361 Antistatic Cloth

Lint-free,especially treated cloth.

Dimensions: approx. 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.)

6363 Special Antistatic Cloth

High-grade lint-free cloth with chainstitched border for cleaning and antistatic treatment of films, glass, and lenses. Also suitable for phonograph records, plastic parts and plastic-coated surfaces.

Dimensions: approx. 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.)

6317 â&#x20AC;&#x17E;Clear Gearâ&#x20AC;&#x153; Compressed Air

6318

For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine mechanical and electronic equipment and components. Without CFC, 100 % nonflammable.

Contents: 200 ml, min.150 g (6.8 floz, min. 5.3 oz.)

9 x 6317

6362/65/67 Cotton Gloves

To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives optical glass, etc. 100 % cotton, washable at all temperatures.

6362: One pair, size 15 6365: One pair, size 12 (standard size) 6367: Three pairs, size 12

4065 Lab Apron

Acid-resistant and washable, made of light pleasant-to-wear material, with seamed edges. Matt black with pocket.

Length: approx. 1 m (40 in.)

Width: approx. 70 cm (28 in.)

Lab

235

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 236

4221 „duka 50“ Darkroom Safelight Lab light with sodium spectral lamp for all colour negative, colour positive and blackand-white processes. The light released is in a tight spectral range of around 589 nm (sensitivity gap for most colour papers). Extra filter for processing variable-contrast papers included. High lighting power. The brightness can be adjusted steplessly to suit the room conditions and paper speed. The light head can be pivoted for direct or indirect lighting.

Usable as table and wall light. Lamp included. Cord: approx. 2 m (6 1/2 ft.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

195 x 250 x 140 mm (7.7 x 9.8 x 5.5 in.)

4222 Sodium Spectral Lamp For „duka 50“ darkroom safelight.

10 watt. Average life approx. 1000 hours.

4224 „duka 5“ Darkroom Safelight Safelight with power-saving Dulux fluorescent lamp. For fast variable-contrast papers and all other black and white papers.

High lighting strength, even illumination.

Light head pivots for direct and indirect lighting. Useable as table- and wall light.

Lamp included. Cord: approx. 2 m (6 1/2 ft.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

195 x 250 x 140 mm (7.7 x 9.8 x 5.5 in)

4229 Fluorescent Lamp For „duka 5“ darkroom safelight.

5 watt. Average life approx. 8000 hours.

236

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 237

4220 „spectral 590“ Darkroom Safelight

Illumintes a broad area with 20 selected LED’s especially adapted to negative-positive processes. The emitted light lies in the narrow spectral range around 590 nm in which most colour papers are insensitive.

Also suited to variable contrast printing paper. Adjustment knob for controlling brightness. Removable special filter for greater brightness in the B & W lab. Dull black housing. Top can be tilted from 0 to 40°.

Mounting on wall can be done for direct or indirect lighting of working area.

Cord: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)

Dimensions: approx. 150 x 110 x 90 mm (5.9 x 4.3 x 3.5 in.)

4018 Darkroom Safelight

2008

Dull black plastic housing. Top tiltable from 0 to 40°. Can be used as wall or table-top light. Mounting on wall can be done either for direct or indirect lighting of working area.

With 9 x 12 cm (3.5 x 4.7 in.) filter for Multigrade papers and graded B&W papers.

Lamp: 15 W, E 14 Cord with cord switch: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)

Dimensions: approx. 140 x 110 x 90 mm (5.5 x 4.3 x 3.5 in.)

Supplied with lamp.

4013–15 Safelight Filter

4227 Darkroom Lamp

Lab

Size 9 x 12 cm (3.5 x 4.7 in.), for 4018 darkroom safelight.

4013: Orange, for B&W silver chlorobromide papers 4014: Red, for orthochromatic papers and films and B&W graded papers.

4015: Multigrade, for variable contrast papers and B&W graded papers Red. 15 W, 220 V, E 27.

Can be used together with clamp-on lamp holder, for example.

237

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 238

4025 „trialux“ Automatic Electronic Exposure Meter

Timer with exposure and contrast metering.

Simple determination of illumination in lux.

For B&W and color negatives and slides.

Exposure timer: Time count-down to zero, the reset to starting time (can be repeated as often as needed for serial exposures).

Interruption and restart of remaining time and interruption with direct reset to the starting time are possible. Focusing light switch.

Exposure reading: Single-spot or multi-spot readings with averaging of max. five spots.

Instantaneous display of readings. The paper index is determined and displayed digitally in lux deconds. Blue-cell silicon diode with color-corrected and linear characteristics over the entire time scale. insensitive to the effect of daylight.

Compact design: the metering diode is integrated in the control panel. Consequently for

4214 „Automatic Timer cpd 2“ Electronic Exposure Meter and Timer

ease of use the LED display and the control panel are also in the enlarger beam during raeding, and an extra and possibly trouble some light source is not necessary.

The power pack is connected to the metering and control units by a flexible cable of 150 cm (60 in.) length.

Specifications: Time range: 0,1 - 999,9 sec Reading range at index 5 (maximum range): 0,1 - 999,9 sec Index range: 0,01 - 99,9 luxsec.

Reading sensitivity: 0,005 - 50 lux Fuse in power pack: 2,5 AT Switching capacity: 500 W Power consumption: approx. 3,2 W Dimensions: Reading and control unit: approx. 142 x 78 x 22 mm (5.6 x 3.1 x 0.9 in.)

Power pack: approx. 157 x 77 x 50 mm (6.2 x 3 x 2 in.)

Cord: approx. 2 m (6.5 ft.)

Exposure timer and exposure meter for B & W and colour negatives and slides.

Selective or integral exposure metering using a separate probe with color-corrected silicon photo element and attachable collecting lens. Three-digit digital display. Start button and Ready display. Elapsed time runs backwards to zero. Interruption and restarting the remaining time as well as interruption with direct reset to the given time is possible.

Can also be used as an exposure timer with manual time setting. Set time using the Step up/Step down buttons.

Additional power outlet for safelight in pushpull switching mode (not suitable for „duka 50“ safelight).

Switching capacity: Time range: Index range: Fuse: Cord:

238

500 watt 0,1 ... 999 sec 0,1 ... 99,9 luxsec 2,5 AT (at 230/240 V) 5 AT (at 120 V) approx. 2 m (6.5 ft.)

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 239

4030 „digital timer“ Electronic Exposure Timer Time range: 0.1 - 99 seconds Display: 0.1 - 9.9 seconds in 10th sec. increments, and 10-99 seconds in sec. increments Maximum switching capacity: 500 W Dimensions: approx. 100 x 75 x 152 mm (3.9 x 3 x 6 in.)

Power cable: 2 m (6 ft 7 in.)

4021/24 ATU 160 / MT 60 Exposure Timer

2-digit amber-colored display. Time settings with step-up/step-down keys. Time countdown to zero, then reset to starting time (can be repeated any number of times for exposure series). Interrupt and restart of remaining time, and interruption with direct reset to the set starting time are likewise possible.

Focusing light switch. Matt black housing made of impact resistant plastic.

Operation by way of four large pushbuttons that can be easily located in the dark.

Powered by snychromotor for time intervals between 1 and 60 seconds. Time set with a knurled knob. Wide start key. The set time can be repeated any number of times for exposure series. Timing can be interrupted. Focusing light switch. Matt black housing made of impact-resistant plastic.

Luminescent scale.

Max. switching capacity: 500 W ATU 160 (4021) with red follow-pointer indicating how much time has elapsed.

Dimensions: Power cable:

4029 cpa 3 Color Analyzer

approx. 100 x 81 x 152 mm (3.9 x 3.2 x 6 in.)

2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

4-channel color analyser for assessing exact filtration. Suitable for processing colour and colour reversal papers. Selective or average metering. Swivel measuring head with 5 mm (0.2 in.) measuring point and channel switch.

Insensitive to darkroom safelight. Digital display of filtration values in densitometric densities of 0 to ±300. Mechanically adjustable memory for storage without power supply.

Measuring range log. density: ±3.5.

Complete with diffuser and screwdriver.

Dimensions: (WxHxD): approx. 170 x 60 x 155 mm (6.7 x 2.4 x 6.1 in.)

Cord: 1.7 m (5 ft. 7 in.)

Lab

239

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 240

4218 Digital Lab Timer

Four-figure LCD display for minutes and seconds. Count-down. Time preset up to max. 99 minutes 59 seconds. Acoustic signal for count-down to zero. Interruption possible. Set starting time retrievable. Magnet on the back for simple fixing to metal surfaces. Including button battery:1.5 V, type G-5.

Dimensions: approx. 88 x 14 x 46 mm (3.5 x .6 x 1.8 in.)

4219 Process Timer

4091 „digi-thermo F“ Digital Thermometer

4026 Gradation Calculator

240

Three independent channels for separate timing, in addition clock, alarm and calendar functions. Time preset up to max. 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds. Acoustic signal for count-down to zero. Set starting times retrievable. Interruption possible. Counts upwards after count-down to zero. Various accoustic signals for simple indentification of different channels. Holder clip for pocket or belt, folding stand foot and magnet for fixing to metal surfaces. Including button battery: 1.5 V, type G-13. Dimensions: approx. 82 x 15 x 70 mm (3.2 x .6 x 2.8 in.)

Battery-powered all-purpose thermometer with LCD display. Four-figure temperature display, switchable from °C to °F. Fast and normal temperature reading option (reading interval 2 sec. and 10 sec.). Settable minimum and maximum temperature, acoustic signal if exceeded or below. Count-down timer. Time interval up to 99 hrs. 59 min. max. Stainless steel temperature sensor with 1 m cable. With pocket clip, hanger eyelet and stand bracket. Reading range: -50° ... +260° C (-58 ° ... +500° F) Battery: 1.5 V Micro/AAA (included) Dimensions approx.105 x 19 x 66 mm (without sensor): (4.1 x .7 x 2.6 in.)

Calculator disk to determine the correct gradation.

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 241

4080 Developing Tank Thermometer

4081 Developing Tank Thermometer

4084 Floating Thermometer

4083 Tray Thermometer

4086 Precision Thermometer

4067 Print Tongs

4062 Print Tongs

4059 Print Tongs and Clamp

Lab

Alcohol-filled. Unbreakable plastic stem. With centigrade and Fahrenheit scales: 0 to 50° C/32 to 120° F. With marker at 18° C/64 ° F. Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.); ø 12 mm (.4 in.)

Alcohol-filled. With centigrade and Fahrenheit scales: 0 to 50° C/32 to 120° F. With marker at 18° C/64° F. Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.), ø 11 mm (.4 in.)

With lead weight to ensure vertical position in the liquid and measurement under the surface. Alcohol-filled bulb. Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales: 0 ... 50°C/32 ... 120°F. With marking at 18°C/64°F. Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.), ø 11 mm (.4 in.)

With angled stem and hook for hanging it on tray’s edge. Alcohol-filled bulb. Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales: 0 ... 50° C/32 ... 120° F. With marking at 18°C/64°F. Length: 85 mm + 45 mm of angled stem (3.3 + 1.8 in.), ø 10 mm (.4 in.)

Especially suited for color processing.

Alcohol-filled bulb. Luminous blue capillary.

Scale from 10 to 50° C, calibrated in steps of .2 degrees, margin of error ± .2°. Max. immersion depth 60 mm (2.4 in.).

Length: 195 mm (7.7 in., ø 12 mm (.5 in.)

Stainless steel, insensitive to photochemicals. With spiral spring and catch for hanging on side of tray. With protective caps especially designed for working with plasticcoated papers.

Length: 150 mm (6 in.) 2 pieces.

Made of chemical-resistant plastic; self- opening. Molded tray edge recess. One pair of different-coloured print tongs.

Length: 160 mm (6.3 in.)

Print tongs made of chemical-resistant plastic, self-opening. Molded tray-edge recess.

Can also be used as film or print clamp.

Length: 180 mm (7.1 in.) Set of two.

241

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr

Seite 242

Lab Trays

Made of shock-resistant plastic. Acid- proof.

Heat resistant up to 80° C (176° F). Grooved bottom enhances removal of paper and ensures best possible flow for chemicals and stability. With pouring lip. 4171 - 73 with recess for tray thermometer.

For sizes up to 13 20 24 30 40 50 50

x x x x x x x

18 25 30 40 50 60 70

cm cm cm cm cm cm cm

/ / / / / / /

5 x 7“ 8 x 10“ 91/2 x 12“ 12 x 16“ 16 x 20“ 20 x 24“ 20 x 271/2

4140-41 Dish Warmer

White

Black

Red

Dimensions(LxWxH): approx. mm/in

4151 4156 4166 4171 4176 4181 4186

4152 4157 4167 4172 4177 4182 4187

4153 4158 4168 4173 4178 4183 4188

235 325 375 460 580 695 790

x x x x x x x

185 260 315 360 490 575 585

x x x x x x x

50 / 9.3 x 7.3 x 2 65 / 12.8 x 10.2 x 2.6 70 / 14.8 x 12.4 x 2.8 85 / 18.1 x 14.2 x 3.3 95 / 22.8 x 19.3 x 3.7 115 / 27.4 x 22.6 x 4.5 105 / 31.1 x 23 x 4.1

All-metal housing in a black stovedenamelled finish. Adjustable thermostat for automatic temperature control.

ON/OFF switch and control light.

Power cable: approx. 2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

Heating capacity: Control range: Tolerance:

300 Watt approx. 20 - 45°C (68 - 113 °F) approx. ±0.5°

4140: for one dish up to 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.) or two dishes 13 x 18 cm (5.1 x 7.1 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 250 x 60 x 340 mm (9.8 x 2.4 x 13.4 in.)

4141: for one dish up to 30 x 40 cm (11.8 x 15.7 in.) or two dishes 20 x 25 cm (7.9 x 9.8 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 310 x 60 x 450 mm (12.2 x 2.4 x 17.7 in.)

242

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 243

4192-95 Chemical Storage Bottle

Made of polyathylene, unbreakable and acid-proof. With screw cap and blank label.

4192: 4193: 4194: 4195:

4198-99 Accordion Bottle

1000 1000 2000 2000

ml, ml, ml, ml,

white black white black

For photochemicals. Black. The accordionlike walls can be pressed together, setting excess air free. This reduces the danger of oxidation and allows for longer storage of chemicals.

With screw-on cap.

4198: 550-1000 ml 4199: 900-2000 ml

4250-55 Graduate

Made of Chemical-resistant polypropylene.

Temperature-resistante up to 95 째C (203 째F).

With pouring lip and wide base for steady stand. Graduated scale.

Content 4250: 50 ml 4252: 100 ml 4253: 250 ml 4254: 500 ml 4255: 1000 ml

4256-57 Graduated Beaker

4243 Funnel

Lab

Scale steps Height mm/in 1 ml 2 ml 5 ml 10 ml 20 ml

150/6 160 /6.3 195 /7.7 220/8.7 285/11.2

Made of chemical-resistant plastic.

Temperature-resistant in excess of 80 째C (176 째F). With pouring lip and scale.

Content Scale steps Height mm/in 4256: 1000 ml 10 ml 150/5.9 4257: 2000 ml 20 ml 215/8.5 For handling photochemicals. Made of nonbrehemical-resistant polyethyakable clene.

Ribbed barrel to prevent airlocks and facilitate fast pouring.

Diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in) Height: 170 mm (6.7 in.)

243

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 244

4296 „Standard“ Developing Tank

4298 Self-Winding Reel

4297 „Universal“ Developing Tank

With adjustable self-winding reel for film size 135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or 220 (roll film). Tank and reel made of nonbreakable plastic. Quick-drain outlet.

Capacity: one film size 135 (35 mm) or two films size 126 or two films size 127 or one film size 220 or two films size 120.

Max. quantity: 500 ml.

Dimensions: ø 100 mm (3.9 in.), height approx. 160 mm (6.3 in.)

Additional reel 4298 available.

For films size 135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or 220. Fits 4296 and 4297 developing tanks.

With two adjustable self-winding reels. For film sizes 135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or 220 (roll film) . Tank and reels made of nonbreakable plastic. Quick-drain outlet.

Capacity:

two films size 135 (35 mm) or four films size 126 or two films size 127 or one film size 220 or two films size 120.

Max. quantity: 650 ml.

Dimensions: ø 100 mm (3.9 in.), height approx. 160 mm (6.3 in.)

4263 Film Washing Hose

For fast and thorough film washing. Fits all Kaiser developing tanks and almost all water faucets.

Length: approx. 55 cm (22 in.)

244

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 245

4299 Negative Lab Set Contains all items required for B & W developing.

Includes: Film wiper 4070, Tank thermometer 4081, Film clips 4117, Chemical storage bottle 1000 ml, white, 4192 Chemical storage bottle 1000 ml, black, 4193 Funnel ø 120 mm 4243 Graduate 250 ml 4253, “Standard“ developing tank 4296

4094–95 PE/RC Print Washer For quick and thorough washing of plasticcoated papers. With connecting hose of 1 m (3.3 ft.) length and hose clip for attaching to water outlet.

4094: for formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.) Capacity approx. 4 l Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 460 x 85 x 360 mm (18.1 x 3.3 x 14.2 in.)

4095: for formats up to 40 x 50 cm (16 x 20 in.) Capacity approx. 9,5 l Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 580 x 95 x 490 mm (22.8 x 3.7 x 19.3 in.)

Lab

245

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 246

4042 Double-Sided Print Dryer

For baryta paper up to size 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.). With aluminium drying surfaces and automatic tightening of covering cloth.

Temperature cna be adjusted between 20 and 80 °C (68 and 176 °F). Uniform distribution of warmth and high temperature constancy even in continuous operation.

Heating power: 200 W Cord: approx. 1.7 m (5 ft. 7 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.

460 x 85 x 380 mm (18.1 x 3.3 x 15 in.)

4047 Replacement Drying Cloth

4048 Drying Rack

For double-sided print dryer 4042.

30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.)

For air-drying of plastic-coated paper (PE/RC papers). For five 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.) or 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.) prints or ten 20 x 25 cm (8 x 10 in.) prints or more prints of smaller size.

Required space: approx. 32 x 22.5 cm (12.6 x 8.9 in.)

Height: approx. 25 cm ((9.8 in.)

4056 Roller Squeegee

For squeezing off excess water from plasticcoated papers. Also suitable for blister-free rolling of prints on glazing pressures and for mounting photographs on particle boards etc. Handy plastic handle. Roller made of moulded PVC, 180 mm (7.1 in.) wide, ø 26 mm (1 in) Dimensions: approx. 190 x 50 x 140 mm (7.5 x 2 x 5.5 in.)

246

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 247

4074 Print Wiper

For wiping off excess water from plasticcoated paper and sheet films. Contoured plastic handle with soft blade.

Length: 300 mm (11.8 in.)

4125 Film Cartridge Opener

For opening 35-mm film cartridges.

Dimensions: approx. 140 x 40 x 40 mm (5.5 x 1.6 x 1.6 in.)

For film leader retriever, film cartridges and DX labels see page 248.

4070 Film Wiper

With four-fold soft rubber blades, 70 mm (2.8 in.) wide. Completely harmless to film.

For film widths up to 60 mm (2.4 in.).

Length: 160 mm (6.3 in.)

4117 Film Clips

For hanging up wet films. 3-hole clip mechanism. Plastic with stainless steel spring.

1 clip with and 1 without weight Dimensions: approx. 27 x 83 x 14 mm (1.1 x 3.3 x .6 in.)

4120 Film Clips

6689 Lab Scissors

For hanging up wet films. 2-hole clip mechanism. Stainless steel model.

1 clip with and 1 without weight Dimensions: approx. 25 x 85 (50) x 25 mm (1 x 3.3 (2) x 1 in.)

Made of fibreglass-reinforced nylon; blades of special heat-treated stainless steel.

Length: 18 cm (7.1 in.)

Lab

247

13_Lab

25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr

Seite 248

4129 Film Loader

For loading bulk 35-mm film into cartridges in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m (98 ft.). With frame counter and remainingfilm meter.

Dimensions: approx. 130 x 110 x 80 mm (5.1 x 4.3 x 3.1 in.)

4124/27 Film Cartridges

For 35-mm film. For self-loading with bulk film material. Clamp fastener on reel axle.

4124: metal type, 5 pcs.

4127: plastic type, 5 pcs.

4128 DX Labels

4132 Film Leader Retriever

248

For coding film cartridges with self-loaded film or changing existing codings. Consisting of three sheets of adhesive labels (each with 10 labels) made of special conductive foil and one sheet of insulating labels in different sizes.

For extracting 35 mm film leader from cartridges into which the film has been wound.

Plastic casing with one fixed and one sliding tongue. Simple use.